F900R manual

Add to my manuals
176 Pages

advertisement

F900R manual | Manualzz

HD CAMCORDER

HDW-F900R

The supplied CD-ROM includes operation manuals for the HDW-F900R

HD Camcorder (English and Japanese versions) in PDF format.

For more details, see “1-4 Using the CD-ROM Manual” on page 16.

OPERATION MANUAL

[English]

1st Edition (Revised 3)

2

WARNING

To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

For the customers in the U.S.A.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment.

All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.

For the State of California, USA only

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery contains perchlorate.

For the customers in Europe

This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC

Directive issued by the Commission of the European

Community.

Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the following European standards:

• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)

• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)

This product is intended for use in the following

Electromagnetic Environments:

E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3

(urban outdoors), E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio).

The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation, 1-7-1

Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan.

The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is

Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327

Stuttgart, Germany. For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents.

For the customers in the USA and Canada

RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES

Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.

You can help preserve our environment by returning your used rechargeable batteries to the collection and recycling location nearest you.

For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-8837, or visit http://www.rbrc.org/

Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking Lithium-Ion batteries.

For the customers in Taiwan only

AVERTISSEMENT

Afin de réduire les risques d’incendie ou d’électrocution, ne pas exposer cet appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.

Afin d’écarter tout risque d’électrocution, garder le coffret fermé. Ne confier l’entretien de l’appareil qu’à un personnel qualifié.

WARNUNG

Um die Gefahr von Bränden oder elektrischen Schlägen zu verringern, darf dieses Gerät nicht Regen oder Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden.

Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse nicht geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie

Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem

Fachpersonal.

Pour les clients européens

Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme à la Directive sur la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) émise par la

Commission de la Communauté européenne.

La conformité à cette directive implique la conformité aux normes européennes suivantes :

• EN55103-1 : Interférences électromagnétiques (émission)

• EN55103-2 : Sensibilité électromagnétique (immunité)

Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les environnements

électromagnétiques suivants :

E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et industrie légère), E3

(urbain extérieur) et E4 (environnement EMC contrôlé, ex. studio de télévision).

Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan,

Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japon.

Le représentant autorisé pour EMC et la sécurité des produits est Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327

Stuttgart, Allemagne. Pour toute question concernant le service ou lagarantie, veuillez consulter les adresses indiquées dans les documents de service ou de garantie séparés.

Pour les utilisateurs aux Etats-Unis et au Canada.

RECYCLAGE DES ACCUMULATEURS AUX IONS DE

LITHIUM

Les accumulateurs aux ions de lithium sont recyclables.

Vous pouvez contribuer à préserver l’environnement en rapportant les piles usées dans un point de collection et recyclage le plus proche.

Pour plus d’informations sur le recyclage des accumulateurs, téléphonez le numéro gratuit 1-800-822-8837 (Etats-Unis et

Canada uniquement), ou visitez http://www.rbrc.org/

Avertissment: Ne pas utiliser des accumulateurs aux ions de lithium qui sont endommagées ou qui fuient.

Für Kunden in Europa

Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung und erfüllt die

EMV-Richtlinie der EG-Kommission.

Angewandte Normen:

• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit

(Störaussendung)

• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit

(Störfestigkeit)

Für die folgenden elektromagnetischen Umgebungen:

E1 (Wohnbereich), E2 (kommerzieller und in beschränktem

Maße industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im Freien) und

E4 (kontrollierter EMVBereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio).

Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony Corporation, 1-7-1

Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan.

Der autorisierte Repräsentant für EMV und Produktsicherheit ist Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327

Stuttgart, Deutschland. Bei jeglichen Angelegenheiten in

Bezug auf Kundendienst oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte an die in den separaten Kundendienst- oder

Garantiedokumenten aufgeführten Anschriften.

3

Table of Contents

Setting the Frame Frequency ............................................... 9

Chapter 1 Overview

1-1 Features ......................................................................... 11

1-1-1 Camera Features .............................................................11

1-1-2 VTR Features ..................................................................12

1-1-3 Other Features.................................................................12

1-2 Example of System Configuration .............................. 14

1-3 Precautions ................................................................... 15

1-4 Using the CD-ROM Manual .......................................... 16

1-4-1 Preparations ....................................................................16

1-4-2 Reading the CD-ROM Manual ....................................... 16

Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

2-1 Power Supply ................................................................ 17

2-2 Accessory Attachments ............................................... 18

2-3 Audio Functions............................................................ 19

2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions ........... 22

2-5 Menu Operating Section............................................... 27

2-6 Time Code System ........................................................ 29

2-7 Warnings and Indications ............................................ 31

2-8 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel ........ 32

2-9 Indicators in the Viewfinder ......................................... 34

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

3-1 About Cassettes............................................................ 35

3-1-1 Loading and Unloading a Cassette ................................. 35

3-1-2 Preventing Accidental Erasure........................................ 36

3-2 Recording ...................................................................... 37

3-2-1 Basic Procedures.............................................................37

3-2-2 Continuous Recording .................................................... 38

3-2-3 Recording Good Shot Marks .......................................... 39

3-2-4 Recording a Recording Start Mark ................................. 40

3-2-5 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of Pre-Stored Picture

Data (Picture Cache Function: with the HKDW-703).... 41

4

Table of Contents

3-2-6 Shooting Picture at Intervals (Interval Rec Function: with the HKDW-703)..............................................................43

3-2-7 Continuous Recording on Previous Cut..........................50

3-2-8 Searching for the Last Recorded Portion and Turning on

Recording Pause Mode (End Search Function) ..............51

3-3 Checking Recording and Playback..............................51

3-3-1 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording —

Recording Review...........................................................51

3-3-2 Checking the Recording on the Color Video Monitor —

Playback in Color............................................................52

3-3-3 Checking the Camera Picture on the Viewfinder and/or

Color Video Monitor.......................................................52

3-4 Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the

Memory Label — Tele-File ............................................53

3-4-1 Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the

Memory Label.................................................................53

3-4-2 Recording a Tele-File Mark (OK/NG/KP) onto the

Memory Label.................................................................53

3-4-3 Warning/Error Messages in Memory Label Operation...55

3-4-4 Confirming the Remaining Capacity on the Memory

Label ...............................................................................56

3-4-5 Clearing Recorded Data ..................................................56

3-5 Freezing a Picture During Playback.............................57

3-6 Setting the Stand-by off Timer During Rec-Pause .....58

Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording

4-1 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance .59

4-1-1 Adjusting the Black Balance...........................................59

4-1-2 Adjusting the White Balance ..........................................60

4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter ......................................62

4-2-1 Shutter Modes .................................................................62

4-2-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed ...............63

4-3 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris

Adjustment.....................................................................66

4-4 Adjusting the Audio Level ............................................68

4-4-1 Manually Adjusting the Audio Input Level of the AUDIO

IN CH-1/CH-2 Connectors .............................................68

4-4-2 Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the Front

Microphone .....................................................................69

4-4-3 Input Level of Audio Channels CH-3 and CH-4 ............70

4-5 Setting the Time Data ....................................................72

4-5-1 Setting the Time Code.....................................................72

4-5-2 Saving the Actual Time in the Time Code......................72

Table of Contents

5

4-5-3 Setting the User Bits ....................................................... 73

4-5-4 Synchronizing the Time Code ........................................ 73

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

5-1 Menu Organization and Operation .............................. 75

5-1-1 Menu Organization ......................................................... 75

5-1-2 Basic Menu Operations................................................... 76

5-1-3 Editing the USER Menu ................................................. 78

5-1-4 Adding Functions to be Assigned to Assignable

Switches..........................................................................80

5-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen ................... 82

5-2-1 Layout of the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen.82

5-2-2 Selecting Display Items .................................................. 84

5-2-3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation/

Adjustment Progress Messages ...................................... 85

5-2-4 Selecting the Items for Which the ‘!’ LED is to Light ...86

5-2-5 Setting Marker Display ................................................... 87

5-2-6 Setting the Viewfinder .................................................... 88

5-2-7 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the Color Bars..88

5-2-8 Setting the Shot ID.......................................................... 89

5-2-9 Displaying the Status Confirmation Windows ............... 91

5-2-10 Confirming the Image of the Return Video Signal in the

Viewfinder ......................................................................92

5-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus ...................... 93

5-3-1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions .... 93

5-3-2 Selecting Output Signals................................................. 94

5-3-3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually ....................... 95

5-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance

Setting .............................................................................95

5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches ................. 96

5-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock ................... 98

5-3-7 Selecting a Lens File....................................................... 99

5-3-8 Using UMID Data......................................................... 100

5-3-9 Using the Hyper Gamma .............................................. 102

5-3-10 Using the USER Gamma ............................................ 103

5-3-11 Using the Freeze Mix Function .................................. 104

5-4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard

Settings........................................................................ 107

6

Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading User Setting Data

6-1 Saving and Loading User Files ..................................108

6-1-1 Handling the “Memory Stick” ......................................108

6-1-2 Saving USER Menu Data (User File) to the “Memory

Stick”.............................................................................109

6-1-3 Loading Saved Data from a “Memory Stick” ...............111

6-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files................................112

6-2-1 Saving a Scene File .......................................................112

6-2-2 Loading a Scene File.....................................................114

6-2-3 Resetting the Camcorder Settings to the Standard Settings

Saved in the Reference File ..........................................115

6-3 Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a

“Memory Stick”............................................................116

Chapter 7 Setting Up the Camcorder

7-1 Power Supply ...............................................................118

7-1-1 Using a Battery Pack.....................................................118

7-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to an Exhausted

Battery...........................................................................118

7-1-3 Using an AC Adaptor....................................................119

7-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight System ....................119

7-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder.............................................119

7-2-1 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position................................119

7-2-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen.................120

7-2-3 Detaching the Viewfinder .............................................120

7-2-4 Detaching the Eyepiece.................................................121

7-3 Mounting the Lens.......................................................122

7-4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length............................122

7-5 Audio Input System .....................................................123

7-5-1 Using the Supplied Microphone....................................123

7-5-2 Using an External Microphone .....................................124

7-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a UHF Wireless

Microphone System).....................................................126

7-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment .....................127

7-6 Tripod Mounting ..........................................................127

7-7 Attaching/Detaching the Shoulder Strap...................128

7-8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position ........................129

7-9 Attaching the Rain Cover (Not Supplied) ..................129

7-10 Connecting the Remote Control Unit.......................130

Table of Contents

7

Chapter 8 Maintenance

8-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting .................. 132

8-1-1 Preparations for Testing................................................ 132

8-1-2 Testing the Camera ....................................................... 132

8-1-3 Testing the VTR............................................................134

8-2 Maintenance ................................................................ 136

8-2-1 Cleaning the Video Heads ............................................ 136

8-2-2 Cleaning the Viewfinder ............................................... 136

8-2-3 Cleaning the Tape Transport System............................ 136

8-2-4 Performing Maintenance After Use Under Severe

Condition ......................................................................136

8-2-5 Note About the Battery Terminal ................................. 137

8-3 Periodic Inspection ..................................................... 137

8-3-1 Hours Meter ..................................................................137

8-3-2 List of Parts for the Periodic Inspection ....................... 138

8-4 Operation Warnings.................................................... 139

Appendixes

Specifications..................................................................... 141

General .................................................................................... 141

Video Camera Section .............................................................141

VTR Section ............................................................................142

Recommended Additional Equipment .................................... 142

Menu List ............................................................................ 144

OPERATION Menu ................................................................144

PAINT Menu ...........................................................................152

MAINTENANCE Menu ......................................................... 157

FILE Menu ..............................................................................166

DIAGNOSIS Menu .................................................................169

About a “Memory Stick”.................................................... 170

Index.................................................................................... 172

8

Table of Contents

Setting the Frame

Frequency

The factory setting of the frame frequency of the camcorder is 23.98PsF. To use the camcorder with a format other than the 23.98PsF format, you should change the setting of the frame frequency first.

Or, if you have used the MAINTENANCE menu before, the page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended appears.

4

When the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the

MENU knob once, and then turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to FORMAT.

MENU knob

Switch cover

MENU ON/OFF switch

POWER switch

Or, turn the MENU knob until the FORMAT page appears from the CONTENTS page.

When any page of the MAINTENANCE menu is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the FORMAT page appears.

5

Push the MENU knob.

The FORMAT page appears.

Frame frequency currently selected

1

Set the POWER switch to ON.

2

Open the switch cover, and then set the MENU ON/

OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU knob.

The TOP menu appears.

6

Confirm the b

mark is positioned at NEXT, then push the MENU knob.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

MAINTENANCE, then push the MENU knob.

When the MAINTENANCE menu is used for the first time, the CONTENTS page appears.

When a question mark appears at the top left of the title page, you can switch pages by turning the MENU knob

The b

mark to the left of NEXT changes to a z mark, and the z mark to the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

7

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired frame frequency appears.

Setting the Frame Frequency

9

The frame frequency selected on the NEXT line is displayed on a colored background.

The setting changes in the order of 59.94 y 50i y

23.98 y 24PsF y 25PsF y 29.97 …

The frame frequency selected on the NEXT line is displayed on a colored background.

The message “PLEASE POWER OFF b

ON TO

CHANGE FORMAT” appears.

Note

Some frame frequencies are abbreviated when displayed on the menu.

Menu display

59.94

50i

23.98

24PsF

25PsF

29.97

Frame frequency

59.94i

50i

23.98PsF

24PsF

25PsF

29.97PsF

8

Set the POWER switch to OFF once, and then to ON.

The camcorder will operate at the desired frame frequency.

Even if you do not push the MENU knob to execute the change, the frame frequency selected in step 7 becomes effective only by turning the power of the camcorder off and on again.

10

Setting the Frame Frequency

Overview

Chapter

1

1-1 Features

The HDW-F900R camcorder is a color video camera with

1920 (H) × 1080 (V) effective picture elements; it incorporates 2/3-inch CCDs with 2,000,000 picture elements and an HDCAM format recorder combined integrally. The camcorder allows you to record and play back with a frame frequency of 59.94i, 50i, 29.97PsF or

25PsF, in addition to the basic frame frequency of 24PsF and 23.98PsF. The introduction of new integrated circuit technology (LSI) for processing the HD digital signal improves the image quality even further, and simplifies setup (initialization) operations.

1-1-1 Camera Features

2

/

3

-inch Power HAD

1)

CCDs

The high sensitivity, low smear

2

/

3

-inch Power HAD

CCDs (FIT-type CCDs) provide high image quality, which puts this HD camcorder at the top of its class.

The camcorder is compatible with multiple formats such as

23.98PsF, 24PsF, 25PsF, 29.97PsF, 59.94i, and 50i.

(However, the camcorder is not compatible with the 60i and 30P formats.)

1) Abbreviation of “Power Hole-Accumulated Diode.” “Power HAD” is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.

Camera signal processing for high quality video

• The 12-bit A/D converter provides stable, high-quality images and reliability.

• Blur-free shooting is ensured by a built-in, high performance electronic shutter that provides a variety of modes, such as ECS

1)

mode which reduces flickering on the monitor screen, and S-EVS

2)

mode that improves vertical resolution.

1) ECS: Extended Clear Scan

2) S-EVS: Super Enhanced Vertical Definition System

Shooting functions to cope with different shooting conditions

• The multiple formats allow you to use the camcorder with various applications regardless of shooting format.

• With the scene file function, you can easily recall sets of adjustment values from the built-in memory, to match particular lighting conditions.

• The ATW

1)

function provides automatic white balance adjustment in response to changing lighting conditions.

• The TruEye™

2)

process yields distortion-free video, even with high intensity colors.

• The TURBO GAIN button enables an instantaneous boost of the video gain to the maximum 42 dB.

1) ATW: Auto Tracing White balance

2) TruEye: “TruEye” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Wide range of menu settings

The menus provide a wide variety of operations and settings, including:

• Status display, message, and marker display settings

• Camera adjustment settings

• Assignable switch function assignment

• “Memory Stick

1)

” operations

You can assign any settings to a USER menu, to create customized menus.

1) “Memory Stick” is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.

Saving and recalling settings from a

“Memory Stick”

Using an optional “Memory Stick,” you can save menu settings for particular shooting conditions, for recall as required.

Down converter/2-3 pull-down function

• Attaching an optional HKDW-702 extension board

(converting to a 525/59.94i and 625/50i signal) allows you to monitor the camera image and playback image in

1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 1080/29.97PsF and 1080/25PsF formats on an NTSC/PAL monitor. Attaching an optional HKDW-902R extension board which has 2-3 pull-down conversion function allows you to monitor the

Features

11

camera image and playback image in 1080/23.98PsF and

1080/59.94i format on an NTSC monitor.

• These optional boards make it possible to output an SDI signal (corresponding to Embedded Audio).

• Three down-conversion modes are available: SQEZE,

LETTR BOX and CROP.

Slow shutter mode function

Installing an optional HKDW-905R extension board enables the camcorder to store up to 64 frames. The slow shutter function is useful not only for shooting in extremely dark conditions without noise, but also for shooting moving objects with a special afterimage effect.

Image inversion function

Installing an optional HKDW-905R extension board, which has an anti-image inversion function, allows you to cancel the image inversion phenomena that occurs when a cine-lens converter is used.

Note

The slow shutter and image inversion functions of the optional HKDW-905R extension board, cannot be used at the same time.

Remote control connectors

By connecting an optional RM-B150/B750 or similar remote control unit, you can control the camera settings of the camcorder externally.

1-1-2 VTR Features

HDCAM format

• Use of the HDCAM format allows high performance HD digital recording and playback while preserving the same ease of use as conventional camcorder equipment.

• The same cassette size (S size) as Digital Betacam can be used to achieve the following long recording times.

For 30 frames (59.94i and 29.97PsF): Approximately 40 minutes

For 25 frames (50i and 25PsF): Approximately 48 minutes

For 24 frames (24PsF and 23.98PsF): Approximately 50 minutes

Time Code operations

• LTC

1)

and VITC

2)

recording and LTC playback are available.

• The built-in time code generator can be synchronized with an external generator.

• A lithium battery provides the back-up power supply for the built-in time code generator enabling the camcorder to hold the time code for approximately 5 years without supplying the power to the camcorder.

• The time code can be displayed in the LCD window screen even when the power is off. The automatic power shut-off function allows you to set the time to be displayed from among three patterns.

1) LTC: Longitudinal Time Code

2) VITC: Vertical Interval Time Code

Picture cache recording/interval recording function

Installing an optional HKDW-703 extension board allows the camcorder to constantly store a few seconds (up to 8 seconds) of the most current picture and sound data in the board’s memory. As a result, when you press the VTR

START button, the recording starts with the data stored a few seconds before. Installing an optional HKDW-703 extension board enables the camcorder to record pictures intermittently.

Other VTR functions

• Recording continuity from the very next frame is ensured.

• You can automatically rewind and review the last 2 seconds of the recording on the tape for a quick check immediately after shooting.

• A four-times-normal speed color search function provides quick positioning of the tape.

• With the RE-TAKE function, the camcorder searches for the most recently recorded cut and records the new cut over it.

• With the End-Search function, the camcorder searches for the point most recently recorded on the tape and automatically switches to recording pause mode (REC pause).

• The camcorder is compatible with the Tele-File

1)

Memory Label system. When you press the RET button on the lens while recording, the time code valid when you pressed the button is recorded on an optional MLB-

1M-100 memory label attached to the cassette. This is very helpful for management of cassette tapes and to improve the efficiency of tape editing.

1) Tele-File: The Tele-File system is a non-contact data reading/writing system that allows data about recorded material to be stored on a tape label with a non-contact IC memory.

1-1-3 Other Features

HD-SDI output connectors

Two HD-SDI (Embedded Audio) output connectors allow you to monitor camera and playback images without attaching a camera adaptor.

12

Features

Audio functions

• The MIC IN (microphone input) connector (XLR type,

5-pin, female) allows you to connect the supplied stereo microphone. You can record either stereo or monaural sound.

• An optional slot-in UHF portable tuner, WRR-855A/

855B, can be attached.

• The two AUDIO IN connectors (XLR type, 3-pin) on the rear panel can be switched to line input, microphone input, or + 48V external power, and also to AES/EBU digital audio inputs.

• Four channels of 20-bit digital audio can be recorded.

• The AUDIO OUT connector (XLR 5-pin) allows the camcorder to output signals as stereo audio.

Proper balancing design

The camcorder features a new shoulder-pad system that enables you to adjust the front-to-rear direction position (to ensure proper balance) without the use of any tools.

Freeze Mix function

Apart from the freeze function to obtain a freeze-frame picture from the playback picture on the VTR, a freezeframe picture of the video signal input from the camera can be obtained. The obitained freeze-frame picture and the video from the camera can then be mixed and displayed.

This function is available only when the HKDW-905R

Slow Shutter and Image Inverter Board is installed.

Function extension interface and optional boards

An extension connector can be attached to the battery attachment on the rear panel.

Use of the following optional boards permits you to expand the existing functions.

• HKDW-702 Down Converter Board

• HKDW-703 Picture Cache Board

• HKDW-902R 2-3 Pull Down Down Converter Board

• HKDW-905R Slow Shutter and Image Inverter Board

Features

13

1-2 Example of System Configuration

The diagram below shows a typical configuration of the camcorder for ENG and EFP.

In this manual, an optional HDVF-20A HD Electronic

Viewfinder is used to instruct how to operate the unit.

For more information about the fittings, connections, or

use of additional equipment and accessories, see “Chapter

7 Setting Up the Camcorder” as well as the operation

manuals for the connected equipment.

Viewfinder-related equipment

Name / Purpose Magnification

Fog-proof filter —

Lens assembly

Lens assembly

–2.8 D to +2.0 D

–3.6 D to –0.8 D

Part No.

1-547-341-11

A-8262-537-A

A-8262-538-A

Lens assembly –3.6 D to +0.4 D A-8267-737-A

Lens assembly

(3

× magnification)

–2.4 D to +0.5 D A-8314-798-A

BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket

Viewfinder

HDVF-20A HD Electronic Viewfinder

HDVF-C30W HD Electronic Viewfinder

Audio input signals

External microphone ECM-674/678 or similar microphone

CAC-12 Microphone Holder

Analog audio equipment

CCXA-53 audio cable

WRR-861A/861B/862A/862B UHF Portable Tuner

WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit

Control signals

RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit

“Memory Stick” (see page 143)

AC power suppl y

Product

AC Adaptor

Model name

AC-DN10

Battery

Product

Battery Charger

Battery Pack

Model name

BC-L70/M150

BP-GL65/GL95/L60S

Extension board

Product Model name

Down Converter Board HKDW-702

Picture Cache Board

2-3 Pull Down Down

Converter Board

Slow Shutter and

Image Inverter Board

HKDW-703

HKDW-902R

HKDW-905R

Video output

Video monitor for color image check during shooting

Audio output

Audio equipment for monitoring (XLR 5-pin connector)

14

Example of System Configuration

1-3 Precautions

Use and Storage

Do not subject the unit to severe shocks

The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped.

After use

Always turn off the power.

Before storing the unit for a long period

Remove the battery pack.

Use and storage locations

Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places:

• Places subject to temperature extremes

• Very damp places

• Places subject to severe vibration

• Near strong magnetic fields

• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods

To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices

The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals.

It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this unit be powered off.

Note on laser beams

Laser beams may damage the CCDs. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be careful not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the camera.

Phenomena specific to CCD image sensors

The following phenomena that may appear in images are specific to CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensors.

They do not indicate malfunctions.

White flecks

Although the CCD image sensors are produced with highprecision technologies, fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.

This is related to the principle of CCD image sensors and is not a malfunction.

The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases:

• when operating at a high environmental temperature

• when you have raised the master gain (sensitivity)

• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode

This product has a compensation function and the problem may be alleviated by automatic black balance adjustment

(see page 59).

Vertical smear

When an extremely bright object, such as a strong spotlight or flashlight, is being shot, vertical tails may be produced on the screen, or the image may be distorted.

Monitor screen

Vertical tails shown on the image.

Bright object (e.g. strong spotlight, strong reflected light, flashlight, the sun)

Aliasing

When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they may appear jagged or flicker.

Precautions

15

1-4 Using the CD-ROM

Manual

The supplied CD-ROM includes versions of the Operation

Manual for the HDW-F900R in English and Japanese in

PDF format.

1-4-1 Preparations

The following program must be installed on your computer in order to read the operation manuals contained on the

CD-ROM.

• Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher

Memo

If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it from the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/

Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

1-4-2 Reading the CD-ROM Manual

To read the operation manual contained on the CD-ROM, do the following.

1

Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive.

A cover page appears automatically in your browser.

If it does not appear automatically in the browser, double-click on the index.htm file on the CD-ROM.

2

Select and click on the operation manual that you want to read.

This opens the PDF file of the operation manual.

Memo

The files may not be displayed properly, depending on the version of Adobe Reader. In such a case, install the latest

version you can download from the URL mentioned in “1-

4-1 Preparations” above.

Notes

• If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you can purchase a new one to replace it. Contact your Sony service representative.

• You can purchase a printed version of the operation manual (English version). Contact your Sony service representative.

When ordering, be sure to specify the part number of the manual you want.

Part No.

3-991-858-0X

Models covered

HDW-F900R

16

Using the CD-ROM Manual

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Chapter

2

2-1 Power Supply

a Battery attachment b DC IN connector c POWER switch d LIGHT switch a Battery attachment

Attach a battery pack, BP-GL65, BP-GL95, or BP-L60S.

Alternatively, by attaching an AC-DN10 AC Adaptor, you can operate the camcorder from AC power.

b DC IN connector (XLR type, 4-pin, male)

To operate the camcorder using an AC power supply, connect an AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor with the DC output cable supplied with the adaptor.

To use an external battery, connect its DC output cable to the DC IN connector.

When this connector is not being used, attach the supplied

XLR connector cover onto it.

c POWER switch

Turns the main power supply on and off.

d LIGHT switch

Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT connector is turned on and off.

AUTO: When the switch on the video light is in the on position, putting the camcorder in recording mode turns the video light on automatically. When using the auto interval recording mode, the video light is automatically turned on immediately before recording starts.

MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off manually, using its own switch.

Power Supply

17

2-2 Accessory Attachments

a Shoulder strap posts b Light shoe c LIGHT connector d Lens mount e Lens mount lever f Lens mount cap g LENS connector i Shoulder pad h Tripod mount

Lens cable clamp a Shoulder strap posts

Attach the supplied shoulder strap to these posts.

For details, see “7-7 Attaching/Detaching the Shoulder

Strap” on page 128.

b Light shoe

Attach an optional accessory such as a video light to this shoe.

c LIGHT connector (2-pin, female)

Connect the cable of an Anton Bauer Ultralight System attached to the light shoe. The system operates with lights powered by 12 V, with a maximum power consumption of

50 W.

d Lens mount (special bayonet mount)

Use this for mounting the lens.

e Lens mount lever

After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position.

f Lens mount cap

Remove this cap by pushing up the lens mounting lever.

When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for protection from dust.

g LENS connector (12-pin)

Fit the lens cable to this connector. Contact your Sony representative for more information about the lenses you can use.

h Tripod mount

When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the tripod adaptor (optional).

i Shoulder pad

You can move the shoulder pad forwards or backwards by raising up the shoulder pad locking lever. Do this to ensure the best balance when shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder.

For details, see “7-8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position” on page 129.

18

Accessory Attachments

2-3 Audio Functions

a Microphone h Built-in speaker b MIC IN connector c MIC LEVEL control d EARPHONE jack (rear) g ALARM volume control f MONITOR volume control e MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch d EARPHONE jack (front)

Audio functions (1)

a Microphone

This is a supplied directivity super-cardioid stereo microphone with an external power supply (+48 V) system.

Assigning the F.MIC MONO/STEREO function to the

ASSIGN 1 switch, ASSIGN 2 switch, or TURBO GAIN button allows you to switch the output signal of the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector between stereo and monaural sound.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

You can connect earphones to both connectors at the same time.

1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.

e MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch

Determine the channel selection for audio monitor output.

MONITOR switch b MIC IN (microphone input) connector (XLR type,

5-pin, female)

Connect the supplied microphone to this connector. A microphone other than the supplied one may also be connected if it can operate with the power (+48 V) supplied from this connector.

c MIC (microphone) LEVEL control

Adjusts the audio level of the microphone connected to the

MIC IN connector. d EARPHONE jacks (minijacks)

You can monitor the E-E sound

1)

during recording and play back sound during playback. Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.

When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone.

CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch:

MONITOR switch:

Selects the audio monitor channels output to the earphone or speaker, depending on the setting of the CH-1/2 / CH-3/

4 switch.

CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch

Determines the pair of audio channels selected with the

MONITOR switch.

CH-1/2 position: channels 1 and 2

CH-3/4 position: channels 3 and 4

The signals output from the AUDIO OUT connector and

EARPHONE jacks and the audio level meter in the display window also depend on the setting of this switch.

Audio Functions

19

CH-1/2 /

CH-3/4 switch position

MONITOR switch position

Audio output

CH-1/2 CH-1

MIX

Audio channel 1

Mix sound of channels 1 and 2

CH-3/4

CH-2

CH-3

MIX

CH-4

Audio channel 2

Audio channel 3

Mix sound of channels 3 and 4

Audio channel 4 f MONITOR volume control

Adjusts the speaker or earphone volume for sounds other than the alarm sound. At the minimum position, no sound can be heard.

g ALARM volume control

Adjusts the speaker or earphone alarm volume. At the minimum position, no sound can be heard.

Minimum Maximum h Built-in speaker

The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound during recording, and play back sound during playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings.

If you connect an earphone to the EARPHONE jack, the speaker is automatically muted.

See “8-4 Operation Warnings” on page 139 for

information about alarms.

i LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls j AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) switches k AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches l CUE IN switch m LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors n +48V/OFF switches o AUDIO OUT connector p AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors q DC OUT 12V connector

Audio functions (2)

i LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel-1 and

channel-2 recording level) controls

Adjust the audio levels of channels 1 and 2 when the

AUDIO SELECT switches are set to MANUAL.

j AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel-1

and channel-2 adjustment method selection) switches

Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels 1 and 2.

AUTO: Select this setting for automatic adjustment.

MANUAL: Select this setting for manual adjustment.

20

Audio Functions

k AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 / CH-3/CH-4 (audio input

selection) switches

CH-1/CH-2 switches

Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.

FRONT: The input signal source is the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector.

REAR: The input signal source is the audio equipment connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.

WIRELESS: The input signal source is an optional WRR-

855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit.

CH-3/CH-4 switches

Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4.

F (front): The input signal source is the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector.

R (rear): The input signal source is the audio equipment connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.

W (wireless): The input signal source is an optional WRR-

855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit.

l CUE IN (cue track input) switch

Selects the input signal to be recorded on the cue track.

CH-1: Signal selected by the AUDIO IN CH-1 switch

MIX: Mixed signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH-1 and

CH-2 switches

CH-2: Signal selected by the AUDIO IN CH-2 switch

Note

When recording mixed signals by setting this switch to

MIX, be sure to confirm that the emphasis settings of the two channels (on/off) are the same. If they are different, the camcorder cannot record or play back mixed signals correctly.

When the AES/EBU format audio signal is selected, the emphasis settings are determined by the channel status of the AES/EBU format audio signal (emphasis bit).

When an audio signal other than the AES/EBU format audio signal is selected, the emphasis setting depends on

the setting of AU REC EMPHASIS (page 159) on the

AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

m LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors

Select the audio source of the audio input signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.

LINE: Line input audio equipment

AES/EBU: AES/EBU format audio signal

MIC: Microphone input

Note

If this selector is set to the MIC position and the +48V/

OFF switch is set to +48V, and if you inadvertently connect any audio device other than a microphone to the AUDIO

IN CH1/CH2 connectors, the device may be damaged.

n +48V/OFF switches

Select either of the following positions for the microphones to be connected.

+48V: For a microphone to use an external power supply

OFF: For a microphone to use an internal power supply o AUDIO OUT (audio output) connector (XLR type,

5-pin, male)

Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.

The MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switches allow you to select the audio signal to be monitored.

When this connector is not being used, attach the supplied

XLR connector cover onto it.

p AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel-1 and

channel-2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin, female)

These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone.

When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to AES/

EBU, the CH1 connector is used for channel-1 and -2 inputs, and the CH2 connector, for channel-3 and -4 inputs.

When the connector is not being used, attach the supplied

XLR connector cover onto it.

q DC OUT 12 V (DC power output) connector (4-pin,

female)

Supplies power for an optional WRR-861A/861B/862A/

862B UHF Portable Tuner. Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF portable tuner.

Audio Functions

21

2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions

a Viewfinder b TALLY indicator c BRIGHT control d CONTRAST control e PEAKING control f ZEBRA switch g TALLY switch h Diopter adjustment ring

Eyecup j Viewfinder left-right positioning ring k Camera operator tally indicator l Viewfinder stopper i Viewfinder front-rear

positioning lever

m LOCK knob a Viewfinder (when an optional HDVF-20A is used)

Lets you view the image in black and white while shooting, recording or playing back. It also displays various warnings and messages related to the settings or operating conditions of the camcorder, a zebra pattern, safety zone marker

1)

, and center marker

2)

.

1) The safety zone marker is a rectangle indicating the effective picture area.

2) The center marker indicates the center of the picture with a crosshair.

For details, see “5-2-5 Setting Marker Display” on page

87.

b TALLY indicator

Shooting and recording/playback functions (1)

Setting the TALLY switch to HIGH or LOW enables this indicator. The indicator lights during recording on the

VTR. Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder, it flashes to indicate a problem. You can set the indicator brightness with the TALLY switch.

c BRIGHT (brightness) control

Adjusts the picture brightness on the viewfinder screen. It has no effect on the camera output signal.

d CONTRAST control

Adjusts the picture contrast on the viewfinder screen. It has no effect on the camera output signal.

e PEAKING control

Adjusts the sharpness of the picture on the viewfinder screen to make focusing easier. It has no effect on the camera output signal.

f ZEBRA switch

Controls the zebra pattern

ON: The zebra pattern

1)

on the viewfinder screen.

is displayed and stays.

OFF: No zebra pattern is displayed.

MOMENT: The zebra pattern is displayed and stays for 5 to 6 seconds.

The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas where the video level is approximately 70%.You can use the setup menu to change the setting so that areas where the video level is 100% and above are also displayed at the same time.

1) The zebra pattern is picture areas where the video level is approximately

70 % and 100 % or more. It is used as a guide when adjusting the iris manually.

22

Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions

For information about how to change the zebra pattern

setting in the setup menu, see “5-2-6 Setting the

Viewfinder” on page 88.

You can assign the function of the ZEBRA switch to the

ASSIGN 1 switch, ASSIGN 2 switch, or TURBO GAIN button on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

g TALLY switch

Controls the TALLY indicator, setting its brightness

(HIGH or LOW) or turning it off.

HIGH: The TALLY indicator brightness is high.

OFF: The TALLY indicator is off.

LOW: The TALLY indicator brightness is low.

h Diopter adjustment ring

Adjusts the viewfinder image for your vision.

i Viewfinder front-rear positioning lever

To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-rear direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK knob. After adjustment, retighten this lever and the LOCK knob.

j Viewfinder left-right positioning ring

Loosen this ring to move the viewfinder sideways.

k Camera operator tally indicator

Lights while the camcorder is recording.

Slide the window open when you shoot with your eye away from the viewfinder. This indicator flashes when the battery level is running low or the tape is almost full.

l Viewfinder stopper

Pull up this stopper to detach the viewfinder from the camera.

m LOCK knob

To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-rear direction, loosen this knob and the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever. After adjustment, retighten this knob and the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever.

n FILTER selector o ASSIGN 1/2 switches p SHUTTER selector q AUTO W/B BAL switch u TURBO GAIN button t WHITE BAL switch s OUTPUT/DCC switch r GAIN selector

Shooting and recording/playback functions (2)

n FILTER selector

Selects the most appropriate filter to match the light source illuminating the subject.

When this selector is used with the display mode set to 3, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about

3 seconds. (e.g.: ND: 1, CC: B)

The relationships between the selector settings and filter selections as well as examples of filters for different shooting conditions are as follows:

FILTER selector (outer knob) setting and CC filter selection

B

C

FILTER selector (outer knob) setting CC filter selection

A 5600K

D

3200K

4300K

6300K

FILTER selector (inner knob) setting and ND filter selection

FILTER selector (inner knob) setting ND filter selection

1 Clear

2 1

/4 ND

Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions

23

FILTER selector (inner knob) setting ND filter selection

3

4

1

/16 ND

1

/64 ND

Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters

Shooting condition CC filter

Sunrise and sunset; inside studio

B (3200K)

Clear skies

Cloudy or raining

C (4300K),

D (6300K) or

A (5600K)

D (6300K) or

A (5600K)

Very bright conditions such as snow, at high altitudes, or at the seashore

C (4300K),

D (6300K) or

A (5600K)

ND filter

1 (clear)

2 (

1

/4 ND) or

3 (

1

/16 ND)

1 (clear) or

2 (

1

/4 ND)

3 (

1

/16 ND) or

4 (

1

/64 ND) o ASSIGN 1/2 switches

You can assign the desired functions to each of the

ASSIGN 1 switch (push button) and ASSIGN 2 switch

(sliding) on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

p SHUTTER selector

Set this selector to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push it down to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or mode setting within the range previously set with the setup menu.

When this selector is operated, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.

For details about the shutter speed and mode settings, see

“4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter” on page 62.

q AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black balance

adjustment) switch

Activates the white balance and black balance automatic adjustment functions.

WHT: Automatic adjustment of the white balance. If the

WHITE BAL switch is set to A or B, the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory. The memory stores a separate white balance setting for each filter setting.

BLK: Automatic adjustment of the black set and black balance.

r GAIN selector

Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected from the setup menu. The factory settings are L = 0 dB, M

= 6 dB, and H = 12 dB.

When this selector is adjusted, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.

For details about setting the gain values, see “5-3-1

Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions” on page 93.

s OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast

control) switch

Switches the video signal that is output to the VTR, viewfinder, and video monitor, between the following:

BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.

CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera. When this is selected, you can switch DCC

1)

on and off with this selector.

1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control)

Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject, objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is particularly effective in the following cases.

•Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day

•Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window

•Any high contrast scene

BARS, DCC OFF

A color bar signal is output and the

DCC circuit does not operate. For example, use the setting for the following purposes.

• Adjusting the video monitor

• Recording the color bar signal

CAM, DCC OFF

The video signal from the camera is output, and the DCC circuit does not operate.

CAM, DCC ON

The video signal from the camera is output, and the DCC circuit operates.

OUTPUT/DCC switch

t WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch

Controls the white balance setting.

PRST (preset): Adjusts the color temperature corresponding to the position of the FILTER selector.

Use the PRST setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance.

A or B: When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pushed to

WHT, the white balance is automatically adjusted according to the current position of the FILTER selector, and the adjusted value is stored in either memory A or memory B. (There are two memories for each filter, allowing a total of eight adjustments to be stored.) When this switch is set to A or B, the camcorder automatically adjusts itself to the stored value corresponding to the current settings of this switch and the FILTER selector.

You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when

ATW

1)

is in use.

1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)

The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions.

24

Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions

B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and on the

FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu,

WHITE SWITCH<B> (page 146) is set to ATW, ATW

is activated.

When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on the setting change/adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.

You can assign the ATW ON/OFF function to the ASSIGN

1 switch (push button) on the FUNCTION 1 page of the

USER menu.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

u TURBO GAIN button

When shooting under extremely poor lighting conditions, press the button once to boost the video gain to the value preset on the GAIN SW page of the USER menu (up to 42 dB). To stop boosting the gain, press the button once more.

The gain is reset to the original gain. You can assign the desired function to this TURBO GAIN button like the

ASSIGN 1 switch on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

v HD-SDI OUT connector w HD-SDI OUT connector x TEST OUT connector y REMOTE connector

Shooting and recording/playback functions (3)

v HD-SDI OUT connector (BNC type) w HD-SDI OUT connector (BNC type)

Output an HD-SDI signal for a video monitor. You can select whether or not the signal is output from these connectors using the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu.

When an optional HKDW-702/902R extension board is attached to the camcorder, the camcorder outputs either a down-converted analog composite signal (color) or an SD

SDI signal from the HD-SDI OUT connector located on the side. You can select which signal is output on the

OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu.

For details on how to select the output signal, see “5-3-2

Selecting Output Signals” on page 94.

converted analog composite signal (color) or an HD-Y signal on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu.

For details on how to select the output signal, see “5-3-2

Selecting Output Signals” on page 94.

Depending on menu settings, menus, time code, and shot data can be superimposed on the image on the monitor. y REMOTE connector (8-pin)

Connect the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit, which makes it possible to control the VTR and camera remotely.

x TEST OUT (test output) connector (BNC type)

Outputs an HD-Y (standard level, 75-ohm terminated) signal for the video monitor.

When an optional HKDW-702/902R extension board is attached to the camcorder, you can select either a down-

Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions

25

z VTR START button wj

VTR SAVE/STBY switch

wk

EJECT button

wl

REW button and indicator

e;

F FWD button and indicator

ea

PLAY button and indicator

es

STOP button

Shooting and recording/playback functions (4)

z VTR START button

Press this button to start recording. Press it again to stop recording. The effect is exactly the same as that of the VTR button on the lens.

When the REC SWITCH function is assigned to the

ASSIGN 1 switch (push button), you can use the switch as the VTR START button.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu. The STBY

OFF TIMER item also allows you to select the length of time until the camcorder turns to power saving mode.

For detailed information, see “3-6 Setting the Stand-by off

Timer During Rec-Pause” on page 58.

wk

EJECT button

Press this button to eject or load a cassette.

wl

REW (rewind) button and indicator

Press this button to rewind the tape. The indicator lights during rewinding.

wj

VTR SAVE/STBY (standby) switch

Controls the VTR power mode during pauses in recording.

SAVE: Power saving mode. When you press the VTR

START button, there is a short delay before recording starts, but power consumption in this mode is less than in standby mode. As a result, battery life is extended.

When the switch is set to SAVE, the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder lights.

STBY: Standby mode. Recording starts as soon as you press the VTR START button.

Notes

• Avoid allowing the camcorder to remain in STBY

(standby) mode for a long time.

• Even if the switch is set to the STBY position, the camcorder can automatically turn to power saving mode if the tape does not run for a certain period. In such a case, the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder lights.

This function is effective when a setting other than OFF is selected for the STBY OFF TIMER item on the VTR e;

F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator

Press this button to fast forward the tape. The indicator lights during fast forward.

ea

Press this button to view the recorded picture in the viewfinder or on the color video monitor. The indicator lights during playback.

The four times normal speed search function is provided to make it far quicker to find a desired location of the tape.

Press the REW button or F FWD button during playback to view the four times normal speed search picture.

es

PLAY button and indicator

STOP button

Press this button to stop the tape.

26

Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions

2-5 Menu Operating Section

a “Memory Stick” compartment c STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch d MENU ON/OFF switch e CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch

Switch cover b MENU knob a “Memory Stick” compartment

ACCESS indicator

MEMORY STICK OPEN button

f

“Memory Stick”

Eject button

Open the cover of the “Memory Stick” compartment by pressing the MEMORY STICK OPEN button and insert the “Memory Stick.”

To remove, press the eject button.

During data writing/loading to/from the “Memory Stick,” the ACCESS indicator lights or flashes.

For details, see “6-1-1 Handling the “Memory Stick”” on page 108.

b MENU knob

Changes the page selection or a setting within the menu.

Push: If you push this knob when the arrow ( b

) is placed at the page title on the menu, the arrow changes to a question mark (?) and you can change the page by turning this knob.

When the arrow mark is placed at a position other than the page title, you can change the setting of the current item by pushing and turning this knob.

Turn: Turn this knob to change the page or change item settings.

c STATUS ON/SEL / OFF (menu display on/page

selection/display off) switch

To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to

OFF.

Closing the switch cover automatically sets the MENU

ON/OFF switch to OFF.

ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed upward, a window to confirm the menu settings and status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen. The window consists of three pages, which are switched each time the switch is pushed upward. Each page is displayed for about 10 seconds.

OFF: To clear the page immediately after display, push this switch down to the OFF position.

You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu.

For details, see “5-2-9 Displaying the Status Confirmation

Windows” on page 91.

d MENU ON/OFF switch

To use this switch, open the switch cover.

This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen.

Menu Operating Section

27

Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to OFF.

ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen, at the last accessed page. When the menu is used for the first time, the first page is displayed.

OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. e CANCEL/PRST (preset) / ESCAPE switch

To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to

ON.

Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this position displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their initial values, depending on the menu operating condition.

Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings or resets the settings to their initial values.

ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, which has a hierarchical structure, is opened. Each time the switch is pushed to this position, the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy.

28

Menu Operating Section

2-6 Time Code System

a GENLOCK IN connector b TC IN connector c TC OUT connector

Time code functions (1)

a GENLOCK IN connector (BNC type)

• This connector inputs an HD reference signal when the camera is to be genlocked or when the time code is to be synchronized with external equipment.

• When the time code is to be synchronized with external equipment, this connector can input an NTSC/PAL analog composite signal as the reference video signal.

• This connector also inputs a return video signal. You can display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder screen when you set RETURN VIDEO to

ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

You can assign the RETURN VIDEO function to the

ASSIGN 1 switch.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

b TC IN (time code input) connector (BNC type)

To synchronize the time code of this camcorder to an external time code, input the reference time code to this connector.

c TC OUT (time code output) connector (BNC type)

To synchronize the time code of an external VTR to that of the camcorder, connect this connector to the reference time code input connector of the external VTR.

Time Code System

29

d HOLD button e RESET button f DISPLAY switch g ADVANCE button h SHIFT button i PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch j F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch k DATA DISPLAY switch

Time code functions (2)

d HOLD (display hold) button

Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the counter display section. (The time code generator continues running.) Pressing this button again releases the hold. You can use this button, for example, to determine the exact time of a particular shot.

When the HOLD button is activated, the time data is displayed in the following format:

PRESET: Records time code with a preset initial value.

REGEN: Records time code continuous with the existing time code recorded on the tape. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-RUN mode.

CLOCK: Records time code synchronized to the internal clock. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-

RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.

For more information, see “To make the time code consecutive” on page 72.

For details of the counter display, see “2-8 Warnings and

Indications on the Display Panel” on page 32.

e RESET button

Pressing this button resets the time data displayed on the counter display section to “00:00:00:00” or the user bit data to “00000000.” f DISPLAY (LCD display) switch

CTL: Displays control signal

TC: Displays time code

DATA: Displays the item selected by the DATA DISPLAY switch.

For details, see “Time code display” on page 33.

j F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording run)

switch

This switch selects the operating mode for the internal time code generator.

F-RUN: Time code keeps advancing, regardless of the operating state of the VTR. Use this setting when aligning the time code with real time or when synchronizing the time code with an external time code.

SET: Set the switch to this position to set the time code or user bits.

R-RUN: The time code value advances only during recording. Use this setting to have a consecutive time code on the tape.

For details, see “4-5-1 Setting the Time Code” on page 72

and “4-5-3 Setting the User Bits” on page 73.

g ADVANCE button

For setting the time code, user bits, or real time, each press of this button increments the flashing digit selected by the

SHIFT button.

h SHIFT button

For setting the time code, user bits, or real time, this button selects the digit to be changed. The selected digit flashes.

k DATA DISPLAY switch

U-BIT: Displays the user bit value

SHOT TIME: Displays the date and time from the shot data

SHOT-NO: Not used i PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch

This switch selects whether to set a new time code or to follow the already recorded time code.

30

Time Code System

2-7 Warnings and Indications

Besides the viewfinder, speaker and earphones, the indicators and displays described in this section also provide you with information such as the operating state of the camcorder and warnings.

a TALLY indicator b DISPLAY/ASPECT switch c TALLY switch d BACK TALLY indicator e BACK TALLY switch f LCD LIGHT switch g WARNING indicator h Display panel i REAR TALLY indicator a TALLY indicator

Setting the TALLY switch on the viewfinder to HIGH or

LOW enables this indicator. It lights when the VTR starts recording. Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder, it also flashes to provide warnings. The brightness of this indicator when it is lit can be switched with the TALLY switch.

b DISPLAY/ASPECT (display/aspect control) switch

Turns the markers on or off and changes the viewfinder screen aspect ratio.

DISPLAY: When the MARKER is set to ON on the

MARKER 1 page of the USER menu, pushing this switch to DISPLAY toggles the markers on the viewfinder screen on and off.

ASPECT: Pushing this switch to ASPECT toggles the viewfinder screen aspect ratio between 16 : 9 and 4 : 3.

For details, see “5-2-5 Setting Marker Display” on page

87.

Note

Setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON displays the menu on the viewfinder screen even if the DISPLAY switch is set to OFF.

c TALLY switch

Controls the TALLY indicator as follows:

HIGH: The TALLY indicator brightness is high.

OFF: The TALLY indicator is off.

LOW: The TALLY indicator brightness is low.

d BACK TALLY indicator

When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON, this indicator has the same function as the TALLY indicator.

e BACK TALLY switch

Enables or disables the BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators.

ON: The BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators are enabled.

Warnings and Indications

31

OFF: The BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators are disabled.

f LCD LIGHT switch

Turns on/off the display panel light.

g WARNING indicator

Lights up or flashes when there is a fault in the VTR.

For details, see “8-4 Operation Warnings” on page 139.

h Display panel

Displays VTR-related warnings, battery status, tape status, audio levels, time data, and so on.

For details, see “2-8 Warnings and Indications on the

Display Panel” on page 32.

i REAR TALLY indicator

When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON, this indicator has the same function as the BACK TALLY indicator.

2-8 Warnings and

Indications on the Display

Panel

Tape status, battery status and audio level

Audio channel level meter:

When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to CH-1/2, the audio channel level 1 is displayed.

When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to CH-3/4, the audio channel level 3 is displayed.

Audio channel level meter:

When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to CH-1/2, the audio channel level 2 is displayed.

When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to CH-3/4, the audio channel level 4 is displayed.

Battery status indicator

Fully charged

Nearly dead: “BATT” flashes.

Dead battery (battery must be charged):

“BATT” and “E” flash.

Tape status indicator

Full (at beginning)

Close to end: “TAPE” flashes.

End (tape must be replaced): “TAPE” and “E” flash.

32

Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel

VTR operation status and status indicators

Lights during playback

Switch settings related to time code and displayed information

Displayed information DISPLAY switch position

CTL

TC

DATA

DATA DISPLAY switch position

Any position

Any position

U-BIT

SHOT TIME

SHOT-NO

Control signal

Time code

User bits

Data and time from shot data

Not used (currently zero is displayed.)

Warning indication

RF: Lights if the recording heads are clogged.

SERVO: Lights if the servo motor fails.

HUMID: Lights if condensation is on the drum.

SLACK: Lights if the tape is not winding properly.

For details, see “8-4 Operation Warnings” on page 139.

Time code display

Lights in playback mode.

Lights in non-drop frame mode.

Lights when the camcorder is synchronized with an external time code.

Lights when the time code generator is on hold.

Lights when the time code, CTL or real time is displayed.

Lights when the HOLD button is pressed.

1)

Time counter display: Shows the time code,

CTL, user bit data, and real time.

1) When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the time code value, the time code is displayed in the format shown below. When the

HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold, the time code is displayed in the normal format.

Relationships between the DISPLAY switch and

DATA DISPLAY switch settings and the time counter displays

Except during setting of the time code, the time counter display is determined by the position of the DISPLAY switch and DATA DISPLAY switch.

For details of setting the time code menu operation, see “4-

5-1 Setting the Time Code” on page 72.

Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel

33

2-9 Indicators in the

Viewfinder

Several indicators are provided above and below the viewfinder screen to indicate the current state and adjustments of the camera.

a TALLY indicator b REC indicators c BATT indicator

Viewfinder screen d

indicator

e VTR SAVE indicator a TALLY (green tally) indicator

Lights in green when the camcorder is in Picture Cache mode.

Also, this indicator blinks in green when the camcorder is in auto Interval Rec mode or manual Interval Rec mode.

When HD SDI REMOTE I/F (page 164) is set to G-TLY

on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, this indicator lights in green when the HDW-250/S280 connected to the HD-SDI OUT connector starts recording.

Note

When HD SDI REMOTE I/F (page 164) is set to G-TLY

on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, this indicator does not light in green even in Picture Cache mode.

b REC (recording/red tally) indicators

Light in red during recording. They also warn by flashing.

For more information, see “8-4 Operation Warnings” on page 139.

When HD SDI REMOTE I/F (page 164) is set to R-TLY

on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, this indicator lights in red while the HDW-250/S280 connected to the HD-SDI OUT connector is recording, even when a cassette is not loaded in the camcorder.

c BATT (battery) indicator

Starts flashing when power level of the battery connected to the camcorder has been reduced, and stays lit when the battery is exhausted.

To prevent interruption during operation, replace the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing.

The level at which the indicator starts flashing can be set

on the BATTERY page (page 158) of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

d

(warning) indicator

Lights up when the camcorder is used under one or more of the following conditions and if the corresponding items have been set to ON on the ‘!’ LED page of the USER menu.

• The gain is set to anything but 0 dB.

• The SHUTTER selector is ON.

• The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.

• The 5600K mode is set to ON.

• ATW is being used.

• The lens extender is being used.

• The FILTER selector is set to anything but ND:1/CC:B.

• The reference value of the auto iris adjustment is anything but the standard value.

• The frame frequency is set to a frequency other than

23.98PsF.

You can change the criteria for whether indicator lights or does not light on the ‘!’ LED STD page of the USER menu.

For details, see “5-2-4 Selecting the Items for Which the ‘!’

LED is to Light” on page 86.

e VTR SAVE indicator

Lights up when the VTR section is set to power save mode by setting the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE.

34

Indicators in the Viewfinder

Recording and Playback

Chapter

3

3-1 About Cassettes

EJECT button

This section describes the procedure for loading and unloading a cassette.

See Specifications “VTR Section” on page 142 for

information about the cassettes you can use in the camcorder.

3-1-1 Loading and Unloading a

Cassette

Loading a cassette

1

Turn on the POWER switch.

Cassette compartment lid

3

Check that there is no slack in the tape. Then slide in the cassette until it clicks into position and close the cassette lid completely by pressing near the engraved

PUSH.

Insert the cassette.

Grip

Window outwards

Cassette holder

Push and close the lid.

POWER switch

HUMID indicator

Note

If the interior of the VTR section is damp, the HUMID indicator will light. If this happens, wait until the indicator goes off before going on to step 2.

2

Press the EJECT button.

The cassette compartment lid will open.

Notes

• To load the cassette correctly, insert the tape with the grip of the camcorder pointing upward as illustrated.

• When inserting the cassette, be careful that you don’t hit the tape against the cassette holder.

Checking the tape for slack

Pressing in the reels lightly, turn them gently with your fingers in the directions shown below. If the reels will not move, there is no slack to adjust.

About Cassettes

35

Unloading a cassette

With the power supply on, press the EJECT button to open the cassette compartment lid. Then take out the cassette. If you are not going to insert another cassette, close the cassette lid.

Even if the battery is exhausted and the VTR stops, it is possible to take out the cassette and close the cassette compartment lid if the remaining battery voltage is about

10.5 V or more. However, when the battery voltage is low, do not repeat the unloading operation. If you repeat the operation, the power may be turned off during the ejection operation and you may not be able to continue the operation.

Note

When you do not intend to use the camcorder for a long time, take out the cassette to protect the tape and turn off the power.

Unloading a cassette manually (manual eject)

When you cannot unload a cassette even if you press the

EJECT button, take out the cassette manually as illustrated below.

3-1-2 Preventing Accidental Erasure

The following procedure prevents cassettes from being recorded inadvertently.

Push the plug in.

To reuse the cassette, return the plug to its original position.

Cassette compartment lid

1

Turn the power off.

2

Open this rubber cover.

3

Pushing on the screw inside with a screwdriver, turn the screw clockwise until the cassette lid opens.

You need not return the screw to its original position after taking out the cassette. Although the cassette compartment lid is not locked, turning on the power makes the cassette lid operable again.

36

About Cassettes

3-2 Recording

3-2-1 Basic Procedures

This section describes the basic procedures for shooting and recording.

Before a shooting session, ensure that the camcorder is functioning properly.

For details, see “8-1 Testing the Camcorder Before

Shooting” on page 132.

From turning on the camcorder to loading a cassette

From adjusting the black balance and white balance to stopping recording

After turning on the power and loading a cassette, set the switches and selectors as shown below and begin operation.

DISPLAY: ON

AUDIO SELECT

CH-1/CH-2: AUTO

Iris: AUTO

Zoom: AUTO

OUTPUT/DCC: CAM, DCC ON

F-RUN/SET/R-RUN:

F-RUN or R-RUN

(set as needed)

Shooting

1

Attach a fully charged battery pack.

For details, see “7-1 Power Supply” on page 118.

2

Set the POWER switch to ON. Check that the HUMID indicator does not appear and that the battery power level is sufficient.

If HUMID indicator appears, wait until it disappears.

Note

After turning off the power, check whether the drum is dry (even if the HUMID indicator is off) with visual inspection when turning on the power again.

3

Check that there are no obstructions near the cassette lid. then push the EJECT button to open the cassette lid.

4

After checking the points below, load the cassette and close the cassette lid.

• The cassette is not write-protected.

• There is no slack in the tape.

1

Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the black balance.

For details of black balance adjustment, see “4-1-1

Adjusting the Black Balance” on page 59.

2

Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting conditions, and adjust the white balance.

When the white balance settings are already in memory

Set the WHITE BAL switch to A or B.

When the white balance setting is not in memory and you do not have enough time to adjust the white balance

Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.

This automatically adjusts the white balance as follows, depending on the setting of the FILTER selector.

A: 5600K

Recording

37

B: 3200K

C: 4300K

D: 6300K

For details, see “4-1-2 Adjusting the White Balance” on page 60.

3

Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and zoom.

4

If necessary, set the electronic shutter for an appropriate mode and speed.

For details, see “4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter” on page 62.

5

To start recording, press the VTR START button or the

VTR button on the lens.

If the recording start/stop function is assigned to the

ASSIGN 1 switch, this switch functions as VTR

START button.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to

Assignable Switches” on page 96.

During recording, the REC indicator lights in the viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus control, if necessary.

6

To stop recording, press the VTR START button or the

VTR button on the lens again.

The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off.

Cassette control buttons

During recording, the cassette control buttons (EJECT,

REW, F FWD, PLAY, STOP) have no effect.

Note

When crash-recording without doing continuous recording on a recorded tape, or when recording with the RE-TAKE function, the timecode recorded previously may be displayed for a few seconds when playing back the first part of the cut.

3-2-2 Continuous Recording

If the camcorder is in the recording pause mode, simply pressing the VTR START button on the camcorder or the

VTR button on the lens continues recording exactly from the next frame.

In other cases, you first need to position the tape at an appropriate point.

When the camcorder is in Recording

Pause mode

Pressing the VTR START button on the camcorder or the

VTR button on the lens continues recording at exactly the next frame. However, the time taken before recording starts depends on the setting of the VTR SAVE/STBY switch.

• If the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is in the SAVE position, it takes about 4 seconds before recording starts.

• If the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is in the STBY position, recording starts immediately. However, just after the switch position is changed from SAVE to STBY, it takes about 4 seconds before recording starts.

If you turn off the power during a recording pause

1

Turn on the power again.

2

Press the RET button on the lens.

If an analog composite signal is input to the

GENLOCK IN connector, make sure that RETURN

VIDEO (page 164) is set to OFF on the GENLOCK

page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

The camcorder positions the tape at the appropriate point. Note, however, that this function works only for continuously recorded material or consecutively joined segments totaling at least 3 seconds in length.

3

Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the

VTR button on the lens to start recording.

Continuous recording in other cases

After rewinding or fast forwarding, after removing the cassette, or on a tape that has been partially recorded, you can obtain a continuous recording by following the procedure below.

The End Search function also allows you to continue recording on a partially recorded tape.

38

Recording

For details, see “3-2-8 Searching for the Last Recorded

Portion and Turning on Recording Pause Mode (End

Search Function)” on page 51.

Setting for recording good shot marks on the LTC-UBIT area on the tape

1

Looking in the viewfinder, press the PLAY button to start playback.

2

Press the STOP button at the desired point to begin recording. To continue from the end of a recording already on the tape, press the STOP button immediately after the end of the previously recorded segment (within 0.5 seconds).

3

Press the RET button.

The tape will rewind and will be positioned at the desired point to continue recording.

4

Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the

VTR button on the lens to start recording.

MENU knob

Switch cover

MENU ON/OFF switch

1

Open the switch cover first. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU knob.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

MAINTENANCE, then push the MENU knob.

When the MAINTENANCE menu is used for the first time, the CONTENTS page appears.

3-2-3 Recording Good Shot Marks

Good shot marks 1 and 2 are recorded on the LTC-UBIT area of the tape when the RET button on the lens is pressed during recording. Recording shot marks

1)

1 and 2 for scenes containing important images and sounds enables quick access to the marked points. This increases editing efficiency.

For detailed information on shot marker operations, refer to the manual supplied with your VTR.

A setting on the SHOT MARKER page of the

MAINTENANCE menu determines whether or not good shot marks are recorded to the tape.

1) Shot mark

Time code of the scene to be used as the editing point when editing.

Or, if you have used the MAINTENANCE menu before, the page that was on the screen when the last

MAINTENANCE menu operation ended appears.

3

When the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the

MENU knob once, and then turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to SHOT MARKER.

Or, turn the MENU knob until SHOT MARKER appears from the CONTENTS page.

Recording

39

When any page of the MAINTENANCE menu is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the SHOT

MARKER page appears.

8

Set the mark(s) to be recorded to ON.

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the mark to be set, then push the MENU knob.

4

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark moves to the currently selected item and a z mark appears on the left of the setting.

5

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to LTC UB-

MARKER.

6

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark at the left of LTC UB-MARKER changes to a z mark and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

7

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired setting appears.

The setting changes in the order of SET y ALL y

OFF.

2

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired setting appears.

To record the mark on the tape, select ON.

To not record the mark, select OFF.

3

Push the MENU knob.

4

To set the remaining marks, repeat steps 1, 2, and 3.

9

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. Or, close the switch cover.

The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder.

Recording a shot mark 1

Press the RET button once. On the viewfinder screen, “z” and the time code of the marked point are displayed for about 3 seconds.

Recording a shot mark 2

Press the RET button twice. On the viewfinder screen, “X” and the time code of the marked point are displayed for about 3 seconds.

Item

SET

ALL

Contents

Determines whether or not marks are recorded for the items REC START

MARK, SHOT MARKER 1, and SHOT

MARKER 2 which appear when you select SET.

Records the recording start mark, good shot mark 1, and good shot mark 2.

Does not record any markers.

OFF

When you select SET, go to step 8.

When you select ALL or OFF, go to step 9.

3-2-4 Recording a Recording Start

Mark

You can record a recording start mark at the beginning of the recording.

Using recording start marks enables quick access to the marked points, for efficient editing.

For detailed information on recording start marker operations, refer to the manual supplied with your VTR.

You can set whether or not recording start marks are recorded using the SHOT MARKER page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

40

Recording

For detailed information on setting whether or not

recording start markers are recorded, see “Setting for recording good shot marks on the LTC-UBIT area on the tape” on page 39.

3-2-5 Starting a Shoot with a Few

Seconds of Pre-Stored Picture Data

(Picture Cache Function: with the

HKDW-703)

By installing an optional HKDW-703 extension board in the camcorder, the camcorder is able to constantly store a few seconds (up to 8 seconds) of the most current picture and sound data in the board’s memory.

As a result, when you press the VTR START button or the

VTR button on the lens, the recording starts with the data stored a few seconds before.

Setting the Picture Cache time/Picture

Cache mode

To record in Picture Cache mode, you need to turn on

Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time

(Picture Cache time) using the USER menu.

The Picture Cache time and VTR SAVE/STBY switch settings determine the number of seconds of picture data that will be stored in memory and recorded when you press the VTR START button or VTR button on the lens.

The following table shows the approximate number of seconds worth of picture data (counting back from the time you begin recording) that will be recorded from memory.

However, when changing from SAVE to STBY, or under the special situations explained in the notes on this page, the actual amount of data recorded may be shorter.

Picture Cache time setting and recording start point

Picture Cache time

Recording start point

8 (seconds) (For

50i/25PsF/

24PsF/23.98PsF format)

VTR STBY mode VTR SAVE mode

About 8 seconds before

About 5 seconds before

7 (seconds) (For

59.94i/29.97PsF format)

6 (seconds)

5 (seconds)

About 7 seconds before

About 6 seconds before

About 5 seconds before

About 4 seconds before

About 4 seconds before

1)

About 4 seconds before

4 (seconds)

3 (seconds)

About 4 seconds before

About 3 seconds before

About 4 seconds before

About 3 seconds before

Picture Cache time

2 (seconds)

1 (second)

0 (seconds)

Recording start point

VTR STBY mode VTR SAVE mode

About 2 seconds before

About 2 seconds before

About 1 second before

About 0 seconds before

About 1 second before

About 0 seconds before

1) For 50i/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF format, you can record about 5 second of picture data stored in the memory.

Notes

• After selecting the Picture Cache mode, immediately changing the Picture Cache time, or performing playback or recording review, the picture data stored in memory before this operation becomes unstable. This means that when you press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens, the previously stored picture data will not be recorded.

• During playback or recording review, the picture data is not stored in the HKDW-703’s memory. Picture data corresponding to the duration of playback or recording review will not be in memory and will not be recorded on tape.

Setting procedure

MENU knob MENU ON/OFF switch

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The last accessed menu page appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears.

When the question mark appears at the left corner of the title page, you can switch the pages.

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise to display the desired page

3

Push the MENU knob.

Recording

41

A b

mark appears on the left of the currently selected item and a z mark appears on the left of the setting.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to CACHE/

INTVAL REC.

8

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to CACHE

REC TIME.

5

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of CACHE/INTVAL REC changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

6

Turn the MENU knob until CACHE appears.

As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in the following sequence: OFF y CACHE y A. INT y M. INT.

When CACHE appears, the camcorder is in Picture

Cache mode, where picture, sound, and time code are constantly saved in memory. The TALLY indicator

(green) in the viewfinder is on while picture data is being stored in memory.

Also CACHE REC TIME appears.

Note

When HD SDI REMOTE I/F (page 164) is set to G-

TLY on the FUNCTION 3 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, this TALLY indicator does not light in green even in Picture Cache mode.

9

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of CACHE REC TIME changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

10

Turn the MENU knob until the desired Picture Cache time appears.

As you turn the MENU knob, the Picture Cache time changes in the following sequence: 0SEC y 1SEC y 2SEC y 3SEC y 4SEC y 5SECy

6SEC y 7SEC

1)

.

1) 7 sec for 59.94i/29.97PsF format

8 sec for 50i/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF format

11

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of CACHE REC TIME changes to a b

mark and the ? mark changes to a z mark.

12

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

The menu disappears, and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.

Settings made in Picture Cache mode are maintained until changed.

You can turn Picture Cache mode on and off by assigning the Picture Cache ON/OFF function to one of the assignable switches (ASSIGN 1/2 and TURBO GAIN).

For detailed information on the assignable switches, see

“5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” on page 96.

Note

When recording in Picture Cache mode, VITC is not recorded when the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-

RUN. When it is set to the F-RUN position, VITC is recorded.

7

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of CACHE/INTVAL REC changes to a b

mark, and the camcorder enters the item selection mode.

42

Recording

Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode

The recording procedure in Picture Cache time is basically the same as that for normal recording. However, note the following differences.

• When you record in Picture Cache mode, the picture you shoot is recorded to tape after the Picture Cache time elapses. For this reason, the tape does not stop immediately when you press the VTR START button.

After the VTR START button is pressed, all tape operation buttons (EJECT, REW, F FWD, PLAY, and

STOP) stop functioning until the Picture Cache time has elapsed. During this time, if you press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens, recording starts again as if there were no pause in recording.

• The time the tape stops after stopping recording is equals the Picture Cache time set previously. When the picture data for the duration of the Picture Cache time is not stored in memory due to the subsequent operations, the time until the tape stops equals the duration actually stored and may be shorter than the Picture Cache time.

— You start recording immediately after selecting the

Picture Cache mode.

— You start recording immediately after changing the

Picture Cache time.

— You start recording immediately after playback or recording review.

— You start recording in the Picture Cache mode immediately after the power is turned on.

• The time code stops advancing while time data is being set (when the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to SET).

For this reason, if you start recording immediately after switching to F-RUN or R-RUN (i.e., to a position other than SET), you may overwrite a portion of the previously recorded time code.

• Positions of shot marks may be shifted depending on the

Picture Cache time setting.

• Menu operation for the Picture Cache time setting is disabled during recording. To change the setting, once stop the recording by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens.

When power is lost during recording

• When the power is turned off during recording, the camera will switch itself off after the tape has run for a few seconds.

• If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable, or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording, actual recording of picture data ends the instant the tape is stopped. However, a certain amount of recorded picture data, equal to that recorded during the Picture Cache time, will be lost, because it has not yet been recorded on the tape before the tape stops. For this reason, make sure you do not change the battery while recording.

When the tape runs out during recording

Please note that if the tape runs out and the camcorder stops during recording, a certain amount of recorded picture data, equal to that recorded during the Picture

Cache time, will be lost, because it has not yet been recorded on the tape.

3-2-6 Shooting Picture at Intervals

(Interval Rec Function: with the

HKDW-703)

Installing an optional HKDW-703 extension board in the camcorder enables the camcorder to record pictures at various intervals. There are two kinds of Interval Rec mode:

Auto Interval Rec

In Auto Interval Rec mode, pictures are automatically shot a frame at a time at the specified interval and stored in memory. To use this function you must set the total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length of time for recording on the tape (REC TIME).

Manual Interval Rec

There are two modes of Manual Interval Rec:

• Single Trigger mode

Setting the number of frames to be recorded at one shooting (NUMBER OF FRAME) enables the camcorder to record the number of frames preset each time the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens is pressed.

• Continuous Trigger mode

Pictures are automatically shot by preset frames at preset intervals by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens.

In Auto Interval Rec and Continuous Trigger mode of

Manual Interval Rec, by setting the PRE-LIGHTING function to ON, the light connected to the LIGHT connector automatically turns on before recording starts.

This allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions.

Auto Interval Rec mode settings

To make settings before shooting

To record in Auto Interval Rec mode, you need to turn on

Auto Interval Rec and set the total time from start to finish of shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length of time for recording on the tape (REC TIME), using the USER menu.

Notes

• To make settings for Auto Interval Rec mode, set TAKE

TOTAL TIME first, then REC TIME.

• To turn on the light automatically before recording starts, set the LIGHT switch to AUTO.

Recording

43

To turn on Auto Interval Rec mode, proceed as follows.

6

Turn the MENU knob until A. INT appears.

As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in the following sequence: OFF y CACHE y A. INT y M. INT.

When A. INT appears, the camcorder is in Auto

Interval Rec mode. The TALLY indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes (one flash/second) while the camcorder is in this mode. Also, TAKE TOTAL

TIME, REC TIME and PRE-LIGHTING appear.

MENU knob MENU ON/OFF switch

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The last accessed menu page appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears.

When the question mark appears at the left corner of the title page, you can switch the pages.

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise to display the desired page.

3

Push the MENU knob.

A b

mark appears on the left of the currently selected item and a z mark appears on the left of the setting.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to CACHE/

INTVAL REC.

5

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of CACHE/INTVAL REC changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

7

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of CACHE/INTVAL REC changes to a b

mark, and the camcorder enters the item selection mode.

8

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to TAKE

TOTAL TIME.

9

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of TAKE TOTAL TIME changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

10

Turn the MENU knob until the desired setting of

TAKE TOTAL TIME appears.

As you turn the MENU knob, the setting of TAKE

TOTAL TIME changes in the following sequence:

5M y 10M y 15M y 20M y 30M y 40M y 50M y 1H y 2H y 3H y 4H y 5H y

7H y 10H y 15H y 20H y 30H y 40H y

50H y 70H y 100H.

(M = minutes; H = hours)

11

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of TAKE TOTAL TIME changes to a b

mark and the ? mark changes to a z mark.

44

Recording

12

Turn the MENU knob to move the

TIME.

b

mark to REC

13

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of REC TIME returns to a z mark and the z mark of the setting returns to a ? mark.

14

Turn the MENU knob until the desired time to be recorded on the tape appears.

As you turn the MENU knob, the setting of REC

TIME changes in the following sequence:

5SEC y 10SEC y 15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC y 40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN y 2MIN y

.......38MIN y 39MIN y 40MIN

1)

.

(SEC = seconds; MIN = minutes)

1) You can select a time up to 40MIN for 59.94i/29.97PsF format,

48MIN for 50i/25PsF format, and 50MIN for 24PsF/23.98PsF format.

Note

You cannot set a REC TIME that is more than one thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME.

For example: When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H, the maximum value of REC TIME is 2 MIN. (60 minutes divided by 30 gives 2 minutes.)

The time setting displayed when you turn the MENU knob changes within the available setting times.

Be sure to set REC TIME only after setting TAKE

TOTAL TIME.

15

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of REC TIME returns to a b mark and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

16

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to PRE-

LIGHTING.

17

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of PRE-LIGHTING changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

18

Turn the MENU knob until the desired time to turn on the light before starting to record appears.

As you turn the MENU knob, the PRE-LIGHTING time changes in the following sequence: OFF y

2SEC y 5SEC y 10SEC.

Notes

• Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording.

The light switch must also be set to ON. With these settings, the light turns on and off automatically.

(However, the light remains on continuously if the off time is less than 5 seconds.)

• When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON, the light remains on continuously.

19

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of PRE-LIGHTING returns to a b

mark and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

20

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the message AUTO INTERVAL **M**S indicating

Auto Interval Rec mode appears along the bottom of the viewfinder.

**M**S indicates the shooting interval. For example, when TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H and REC TIME is set to 30 SEC, the message AUTO INTERVAL 00M04S appears. The shooting interval is 4 seconds.

The display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder.

Note

The settings for Auto Interval Rec mode are maintained until changed. However, if you switch off the camcorder power, Auto Interval Rec mode is cleared except for the

TAKE TOTAL TIME, REC TIME and PRE-LIGHTING settings. To use the Auto Interval Rec function again after switching on the power, perform steps 1 to 6.

Recording in Auto Interval Rec mode

Note

When you use blank cassettes, such as brand new cassettes, be sure to record color bars for more than 2 seconds at the beginning of a cassette.

1

After performing the basic procedures for shooting

and recording, following the instructions in “3-2-1

Recording

45

Basic Procedures” (page 37), secure the camcorder so

that it will not move.

2

Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the

VTR button on the lens.

The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode. When you use the PRE-LIGHTING function, recording starts after the light is switched on.

The actual recording to tape begins after the camcorder has saved about five seconds of video in memory, so tape access is intermittent.

While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, the

TALLY indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes (4 flashes/second) and the message “AUTO INTERVAL

**M**S” flashes on the viewfinder screen.

When the camcorder is capturing the picture in memory, the REC indicator in the viewfinder lights.

After the length of time for recording on the tape (REC

TIME) has elapsed, the camcorder automatically stops recording.

To continue auto interval recording

Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the

VTR button on the lens again.

The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode again.

To interrupt auto interval recording

Press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens. The camcorder stops recording.

However, the tape may run to record picture data already stored in memory.

To end auto interval recording

You can exit Auto Interval Rec mode using the following two methods:

• Set the POWER switch to OFF.

• Set CACHE/INTVAL REC to OFF on the FUNCTION

1 page of the USER menu.

Time required for shooting and time required for recording on the tape

Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects that move very slowly. To use this function, you need to set the total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length of time for recording on the tape (REC TIME).

The time required for shooting is the time required to capture the very slowly moving subject, and the camcorder must be arranged so that during this time the subject is always in the frame.

The tape recording time indicates the running time of the completed recording. The camcorder calculates the timelapse interval from these two times.

Total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME)

Shooting interval

Time for recording on the tape (REC TIME)

Notes on Auto Interval Rec operation

Time code

In Auto Interval Rec mode, the internal time code generator runs in R-RUN mode regardless of how the F-

RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set.

Time code set in the menu is saved in the user bits.

Audio

Audio signals are not recorded in Auto Interval Rec mode.

Cassette control buttons

While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, you cannot use the cassette control buttons (EJECT, REW, F FWD,

PLAY and STOP). To use these buttons, stop recording by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens.

Menu operation

While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, you cannot change the settings of CACHE/INTVAL REC, TAKE

TOTAL TIME and REC TIME. To change the settings, stop recording by pressing the VTR START button or the

VTR button on the lens.

When the camcorder power is switched off during recording in Auto Interval Rec mode

• When you set the POWER switch to OFF, the camcorder will switch itself off after the tape has run for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory.

• If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut power to the AC adaptor during auto interval recording, picture data stored before recording stops (a maximum of 5 seconds) may be lost. Take care when changing the battery.

When tape runs out during auto interval recording

Note that picture data (a maximum of 5 seconds) shot and stored before the tape stops is not recorded if the tape runs out and the camcorder stops.

46

Recording

Manual Interval Rec mode

Manual Interval Rec has the following two modes.

Single Trigger mode: Each time the VTR START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder captures to memory a single shot consisting of the specified number of video frames.

Continuous Trigger mode: Once the VTR START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder captures consecutive shots to memory at the specified interval, with each shot consisting of the specified number of video frames.

Setting Single Trigger mode of Manual

Interval Rec

1

Follow steps 1 to 5 in “To make settings before

shooting” (page 43), to select CACHE/INTVAL REC

on the FUNCTION 1 page.

2

Turn the MENU knob until M. INT appears.

The b

mark on the left of NUMBER OF FRAME changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

6

Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of frames to be recorded in each shot appears.

As you turn the MENU knob, the number changes in the following sequence: 1 y 2 y 4 y 8.

7

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of NUMBER OF FRAME returns to a b

mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting returns to a z mark.

8

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

TRIGGER INTERVAL.

As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in the following sequence: OFF y CACHE y A. INT y M. INT.

When M. INT appears, the camcorder is in Manual

Interval Rec mode and the TALLY indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes. NUMBER OF FRAME,

TRIGGER INTERVAL and RE-LIGHTING appear.

3

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of CACHE/INTVAL REC changes to a b

mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting changes to a z mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

NUMBER OF FRAME.

9

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of TRIGGER INTERVAL changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

10

Turn the MENU knob to display M.

5

Push the MENU knob.

If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the number changes in the following sequence: M y 1SEC y 2SEC........12H y 24H.

When M appears, the TALLY indicator (green) flashes

(2 flashes/second) and PRE-LIGHTING disappears.

11

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of TRIGGER INTERVAL returns to a b

mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting returns to a z mark.

12

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Recording

47

The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the message MANU INTERVAL

*FRAME, indicating the single trigger mode of the

Manual Interval Rec mode, appears along the bottom of the viewfinder.

*FRAME indicates the number of frames set in step 6.

The display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder.

Note

The settings for Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval

Rec are maintained until changed. However, if you switch the camcorder power off, all Manual Interval Rec mode settings are cleared except for the NUMBER OF FRAME setting and the single trigger mode selection. To use Single

Trigger mode of the Manual Interval Rec function again after switching on the power, perform steps 1 and 2.

Recording in Single Trigger mode of

Manual Interval Rec

Follow the procedure below to shoot a picture in Single

Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec.

Note

When you use blank cassettes, such as brand new cassettes, be sure to record color bars for more than 2 seconds at the beginning of a cassette.

1

After performing the basic procedure for shooting and

recording following the instructions in “3-2-1 Basic

Procedures” on page 37, secure the camcorder so that

it will not move.

2

Push the VTR START button on the camcorder or the

VTR button on the lens.

The camcorder starts recording in Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec. The TALLY indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes (2 flashes/second) and the message MANU INTERVAL *FRAME flashes on the viewfinder screen.

Each time you press the VTR START button or the

VTR button, the camcorder captures and stores the picture data of the preset number of frames. The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on while the camcorder is capturing the picture in the memory. The camcorder stores picture data (about 5 seconds worth) in memory, and then actually records the stored picture data on the tape. The tape runs intermittently.

To stop recording in Single Trigger mode

You can stop recording in Single Trigger mode of Manual

Rec Interval using the following two methods. However, the tape may continue to run to record the picture data stored in the memory at the instant the tape stopped.

• Press the EJECT button.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF.

Setting Continuous Trigger mode of

Manual Interval Rec

1

Follow steps 1 to 9 in “Setting Single Trigger mode of

Manual Interval Rec” on page 47.

2

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise to display the desired trigger interval.

If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the number changes in the following sequence: M y 1SEC y 2SEC y

3SEC y 4SEC y 5SEC y 6SEC y 7SEC y

8SEC y 9SEC y 10SEC y 15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC y 40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN y

2MIN y 3MIN y 4MIN y 5MIN y 6MIN y

7MIN y 8MIN y 9MIN y 10MIN y 15MIN y 20MIN y 30MIN y 40MIN y 50MIN y

1H y 2H y 3H y 4H y 6H y 12H y 24H.

When a trigger interval time other than M is displayed, the camcorder is in Continuous Trigger mode of

Manual Interval Rec. The TALLY indicator (green) flashes (1 flash/second).

3

Push the MENU knob.

The ? mark on the left of setting returns to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of TRIGGER INTERVAL returns to an b

mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to PRE-

LIGHTING.

5

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of PRE-LIGHTING changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

48

Recording

6

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired time interval at which to turn on the light before recording starts appears.

If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the PRE-LIGHTING time changes in the following sequence: OFF y 2SEC y 5SEC y 10SEC.

Notes

• To turn on the light automatically before recording starts by setting the PRE-LIGHTING item to ON, be sure to set the LIGHT switch to AUTO. Also, set the switch of the light connected to the LIGHT connector to ON.

The light automatically turns on and off in

Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec.

However, if the duration the light should be off is less than 5 seconds, the light is on continuously.

• When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the switch of the light is set to ON, the light is always on.

7

Push the MENU knob.

The ? mark on the left of setting returns to a z mark and the z mark on the left of PRE-LIGHTING returns to an b

mark.

8

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the message INTERVAL *SEC *FRAME, indicating Continuous Trigger mode of Manual

Interval Rec, appears along the bottom of the viewfinder.

*SEC indicates the trigger interval preset and

*FRAME indicates the number of frames preset.

The display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder.

Note

The settings for Continuous Trigger mode of Manual

Interval Rec are maintained until changed. However, if you switch the camcorder power off, all Manual Interval Rec mode settings are cleared except for the NUMBER OF

FRAME, TRIGGER INTERVAL, and PRE-LIGHTING settings. To use Continuous Trigger mode of Manual

Interval Rec again after switching on the power, perform

steps 1 and 2 in “Setting Single Trigger mode of Manual

Interval Rec” on page 47.

Recording in Continuous Trigger mode of

Manual Interval Rec

Note

When you use blank cassettes, such as brand new cassettes, be sure to record color bars for more than 2 seconds at the beginning of a cassette.

1

After performing the basic procedures for shooting

and recording following the instructions in “3-2-1

Basic Procedures” on page 37, secure the camcorder

so that it will not move.

2

Push the VTR START button on the camcorder or the

VTR button on the lens.

The camcorder starts recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec, and the flashing cycle of the TALLY indicator (green) changes from 1 flash/ second to 4 flashes/second, and the message

INTERVAL *SEC *FRAME flashes on the viewfinder screen.

When you use the PRE-LIGHTING function, the light turns on when you press the VTR START button. After the preset PRE-LIGHTING time has elapsed, the camcorder captures the picture in the memory. The camcorder stores picture data (about 5 seconds worth) in memory, and then actually records the stored picture data on the tape. As a result, the tape runs intermittently. The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on while the camcorder is capturing the picture in the memory.

To stop recording in Continuous Trigger mode of

Manual Interval Rec

You can stop recording in Continuous Trigger mode of

Manual Interval Rec using the following two methods.

However, the tape may continue to run to record the picture data stored in the memory at the instant the tape stopped.

• Press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF.

Notes on Manual Interval Rec operation

Take note of the following points which are common to

Single Trigger mode and Continuous Trigger mode.

Differences are clearly noted, if any.

Time code

In Manual Interval Rec mode, the internal time code generator runs in R-RUN mode regardless of how the F-

RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set.

Audio

Audio signals are not recorded in Manual Interval Rec mode.

Recording

49

Cassette control buttons

While recording in Single Trigger mode of Manual

Interval Rec (the green TALLY indicator in the viewfinder flashes (2 flashes/second)), you cannot use the cassette control buttons (REW, F FWD, PLAY and STOP). Note that the camcorder stops recording in the single trigger mode of the Manual Interval Rec mode if you press the

EJECT button.

While recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual

Interval Rec (the TALLY indicator (green) flashes (4 flashes/second)), you cannot use the cassette control buttons (EJECT, REW, F FWD, PLAY and STOP). To stop recording, press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens. However, the tape may run to record the picture data stored in the memory before stopping the manual interval recording.

Menu operation

In Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec, you cannot change the settings of CACHE/INTVAL REC and

NUMBER OF FRAME on the FUNCTION 1 page after the camcorder starts recording. To change the settings, stop recording by pressing the EJECT button or setting the

POWER switch to OFF.

While recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual

Interval Rec, you cannot change the settings of CACHE/

INTVAL REC, NUMBER OF FRAME and TRIGGER

INTERVAL on the FUNCTION 1 page. To change these settings, stop recording by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens or by setting the

POWER switch to OFF.

When the camcorder power is switched off during recording in Manual Interval Rec mode

• When you set the POWER switch to OFF, the camcorder will switch itself off after tape access has continued for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory.

• If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut the power to the AC adaptor during manual interval recording, picture data stored before recording stops (a maximum of 5 seconds) may be lost. Take care when changing the battery.

When tape runs out during recording in Manual

Interval Rec mode

Note that picture data (a maximum of 5 seconds) at the instant the tape stopped is not recorded if the tape runs out and the camcorder stops.

3-2-7 Continuous Recording on

Previous Cut

By assigning the RE-TAKE function to the ASSIGN 1 switch, you can use the ASSIGN 1 switch to position the tape at the most recent cut, clear it and record the new cut.

For detailed information, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” on page 96.

Continuous recording the new cut after the cut before the most recent cut

Tape running direction

Cut 1 Cut 2 Cut 3

Cut 4

Example: After recording cut 3, clearing cut 3 and recording cut 4 after cut 2

1

Press the button on the lens while holding the ASSIGN

1 switch down, in the above example, with the camcorder in the recording pause mode after recording the cut 3.

The camcorder automatically positions the tape at the end point of cut 2 and turns in the recording pause mode.

2

Record cut 4.

Cut 4 is recorded after cut 2.

Notes

• When pictures consisting of cuts recorded using the RE-

TAKE function are played back on a VTR for professional use, the CHANNEL CONDITION indicator, which indicates the condition of the played back signal of the VTR, may be lit in yellow, noise may be added to the cue audio for the first 2 or 3 seconds, or the previously recorded timecode may be displayed for a few seconds. To avoid this, it is recommended that you

make the first part of the cut (in the above “Example:

After recording cut 3, clearing cut 3 and recording cut 4

after cut 2”, cut 4) about 3 seconds longer.

• In the following cases, the RE-TAKE function is not accepted. The message “INVALID OPERATION!” is displayed on the viewfinder screen for three seconds.

—When only one cut has been recorded

—When the length of the recorded cuts is less than 3 seconds

—When Picture Cache is ON

The RE-TAKE function is also not accepted after recording stops until the recording pause operation is completed (about 1 second). The message “INVALID

OPERATION!” is displayed. In this case, the RE-

TAKE function will be accepted when you perform the RE-TAKE operation again after the message disappears.

50

Recording

3-2-8 Searching for the Last

Recorded Portion and Turning on

Recording Pause Mode (End Search

Function)

The End Search function allows the camcorder to search for the end of the recording on the tape after the recorded portion is rewound and played back.

To use this function, set the END SEARCH function to ON on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.

For detailed information on menu operation, see “5-1-2

Basic Menu Operations” on page 76.

Recorded portion

Tape running direction

Blank portion

The current tape position

Searching for the end of the recorded portion and turning on recording pause mode

END SEARCH function

Searching for the end of the recording and turning on recording pause mode

1

Rewind the tape being recorded, then push the PLAY button to start playback.

2

Press the STOP button after checking the recorded image to turn in recording pause mode.

3

Press the RET button on the lens.

The tape automatically runs and stops at the end of the recording. The camcorder is in recording pause mode.

Note

When the STOP KEY FREEZE function is set to become active on the VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the picture is frozen once you push the STOP button during playback. To activate the end search function, push the STOP button again to stop the camcorder, then push the

RET button on the lens.

3-3 Checking Recording and Playback

By pressing the PLAY button, you can review any length of recording in the viewfinder in black and white. There are two other ways to review the recording.

Recording review: You can view the last 2 seconds of the recording in the viewfinder in black and white.

Color playback: You can see the recording in color on a color video monitor without the need for any external adaptor.

You may also view the picture during searching by rewinding or fast forwarding by pressing the PLAY +

REW button or PLAY + F FWD button.

See “2-3 Audio Functions” on page 19 for information

about the switches and controls used to select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level.

Note

If you play back the tape recorded on this camcorder by using the HDW-F900 HD camcorder, the noise may occur.

3-3-1 Checking the Last Two

Seconds of the Recording —

Recording Review

If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is paused, the last 2 seconds of the recording is played back on the viewfinder screen and the color LCD. Use this function to check whether recording went smoothly. If you hold the RET button down longer, at most 10 seconds of the tape is rewound and played back. After playback, the camcorder is ready to start recording again.

By assigning the LENS RET function to the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN button, you can use the

ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN button in the same way as the RET button on the lens.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

Note

The recording review functions only works if the recording you have made is at least 3 seconds long.

Checking Recording and Playback

51

3-3-2 Checking the Recording on the Color Video Monitor — Playback in Color

Connect an HD color video monitor with an HD-SDI input connector to the HD-SDI OUT connector of the camcorder. By pressing the PLAY button, you can view the recorded picture.

HDW-F900R

HD monitor

HDW-F900R

NTSC/PAL monitor

Video input connector

2)

SDI input connector or video input connector

1)

HD-SDI

OUT

1)

TEST OUT

1) For the output signal from the HD-SDI OUT connector, when SDI is selected on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu, connect this connector to the SDI input connector. When VBS is selected, connect it to the video input connector.

2) When SD is selected as the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, connect this connector to the video input connector.

2)

HD-SDI input connector

HD-SDI OUT

Notes

• If HD SDI OUT is set to OFF on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu, you cannot view the recorded picture. Set HD SDI OUT to ON.

• When an optional HKDW-702/902R is installed, connect an HD color video monitor to the HD-SDI OUT connector located on the rear of the camcorder.

For details, see “5-3-2 Selecting Output Signals” on page

94.

When using an optional HKDW-702/902R extension board for down converting

Connect the color video monitor to the TEST OUT connector or the HD-SDI OUT connector of the camcorder located on the side of the camcorder. By pressing the

PLAY button, you can view the recorded picture.

The signal output from each connector depends on the menu settings.

For details, see “5-3-2 Selecting Output Signals” on page

94.

3-3-3 Checking the Camera Picture on the Viewfinder and/or Color Video

Monitor

Usually, during playback of a tape, if you press the PLAY button, the image sent to the viewfinder, the TEST OUT connector, or the HD-SDI OUT connector is switched back and forth between the camera image and the recorded image.

However, the PB VIDEO item on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu allows you to change the setting so that the image seen through the camera is sent to the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector even while you are playing back a video tape.

The HD SDI output from the HD-SDI OUT connector is switched to that of the recorded image during playback, regardless of the PB VIDEO setting.

To output recorded video signal to the viewfinder,

TEST OUT connector, and the HD-SDI OUT connectors

For PB VIDEO (page 146) on the FUNCTION 2 page of

the OPERATION menu, set ALL/HDSDI to ALL.

To output the recorded video signals to the HD-

SDI OUT connector, and the camera image to the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector

For PB VIDEO (page 146) on the FUNCTION 2 page of

the OPERATION menu, set ALL/HDSDI to HDSDI.

52

Checking Recording and Playback

HD monitor

HD-SDI input connector

HD monitor

HDW-F900R

HD-SDI OUT

TEST OUT

Video input connector

3-4 Recording the

Recording Start Time

Code onto the Memory

Label — Tele-File

The VTR section is compatible with the Tele-File memory label system. This system allows you to record the recording start time code, model name, serial number and tape format onto an optional MLB-1M-100 memory label.

Also, a Tele-File mark, that is, a rating of the images recorded just before they are recorded, can be recorded onto the memory label with the recording start time code, every time the unit enters the recording pause mode.

This is very helpful for management of the cassette tapes and to improve the efficiency of tape editing.

The memory label attached to the cassette is detected automatically.

3-4-1 Recording the Recording Start

Time Code onto the Memory Label

1

Insert the cassette onto which the MLB-1M-100 memory label has been attached into the camcorder.

Memory label

Window outwards

Cassette holder

2

Press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens.

At the instant the recording starts, the time code of the recording start is recorded on the memory label.

3-4-2 Recording a Tele-File Mark

(OK/NG/KP) onto the Memory Label

A Tele-File mark, that is, a rating of the images recorded just before they are recorded, can be recorded onto the memory label with the recording start time code, every time the unit enters the recording pause mode.

Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label — Tele-File

53

The following three Tele-File marks are available:

• OK: Place this mark when you decide the recorded images are good.

• NG: Place this mark when you decide the recorded images are not good.

• KP: Place this mark when it is hard to decide whether or not the recorded images are good just after recording, or when you want to insert a mark between multiple shots.

Recorded Tele-File marks are read by studio-use devices, logging software, and so on, which support the Tele-File function. These marks are very helpful for improving the efficiency of tape editing.

Before recording a Tele-File mark

To use this function, the TELE-FILE MARK function should be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch or TURBO

GAIN button.

For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

Recording Tele-File marks

1

Start recording and set the camcorder to recording pause mode by pushing the VTR START button or the

VTR button on the lens.

2

Push the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN button to which the TELE-FILE MARK function is assigned.

The mark to be recorded appears on the viewfinder.

When you record a Tele-File mark for the first time after you turn on the power of the camcorder, the mark selected on the menu appears.

For details, see “ Setting the Tele-File mark to be recorded for the first time after power on” on page 54.

When OK is selected on the menu

This message disappears after 3 seconds. The mark displayed when it disappears from the viewfinder is recorded with the recording start time code.

Message

TELE-FILE MARK: OK

TELE-FILE MARK: NG

Meaning

States that an OK mark has been recorded.

States that an NG mark has been recorded.

Message

TELE-FILE MARK: KP

Meaning

States that a KP mark has been recorded.

TELE-FILE MARK: ERASE States that the Tele-File mark recorded on that shot has been cancelled.

If the mark displayed on the viewfinder is different from the desired one

Push the ASSIGN 1 switch several times while the mark is displayed until the appropriate mark appears on the viewfinder. The mark changes in the order of

OK t NG t KP t ERASE ….

If the display disappears before you select the appropriate mark

Continue pushing the ASSIGN 1 switch until the desired mark appears. If the desired mark disappears from the viewfinder while that mark is displayed, the mark recorded before will be overwritten and the mark newly displayed is recorded.

Notes

• Tele-File marks are recorded only when they are recorded using the ASSIGN 1 switch to which this function has been assigned.

• Tele-File marks can be added only to the shot recorded just before entering the rec pause mode.

When the message “INVALID OPERATION !” appears

This message appears when you perform one of the following misoperations:

• You push the ASSIGN 1 switch before the camcorder enters the recording pause mode after loading the cassette.

• If you turn off the power of the camcorder in recording pause mode and then turn on the power again, the camcorder is in the recording pause mode. Then, you push the ASSIGN 1 switch in this situation.

• You push the ASSIGN 1 switch in a mode other than recording pause mode.

Setting the Tele-File mark to be recorded for the first time after power on

Using the menu, you can select the mark to be recorded in the first recording pause mode when you press the

ASSIGN 1 switch after you turn on the power of the camcorder.

Note

This menu setting allows the camcorder to display a mark when you use the Tele-File mark for the first time after you turn on the power of the camcorder. When you press the

ASSIGN 1 switch after that, the last selected mark appears.

54

Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label — Tele-File

Even if you press the ASSIGN 1 switch when a Tele-File mark is not displayed, the Tele-File mark set on the menu will not be displayed.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU knob.

The TOP menu appears.

5

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired Tele-File mark appears.

The Tele-File mark changes in the order of OK y

NG y KP…

Setting

OK

NG

KP

Contents

When the recorded image is good.

When the recorded image is not good.

When you cannot judge whether the recorded image is good or not good, or when you want to record the mark as the break of multiple shots.

6

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark to the left of TELE FILE MARK changes to a b

mark, and the ? mark to the left of the setting changes to a z mark.

7

To end menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to FILE, then push the MENU knob.

4

When the FILE menu is used for the first time, the

CONTENTS page appears.

Or, if you have used the FILE menu before, the page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended appears.

3

When the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the

MENU knob once, and then turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to TELE FILE, then push the MENU knob again.

When any page of the FILE menu is displayed, turn the

MENU knob until the TELE FILE page appears, then push the MENU knob.

The TELE FILE page appears.

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to TELE

FILE MARK, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark to the left of TELE FILE MARK changes to a z mark, and the z mark to the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3-4-3 Warning/Error Messages in

Memory Label Operation

When Tele-File marks cannot be recorded correctly or may not be recorded, warning/error messages appear.

Warning messages

“TELE-FILE MEMORY FULL!”

• You have loaded a cassette with a memory label whose memory capacity is 0 % attached.

• You have loaded a cassette with a memory label whose memory capacity is 0 % attached, and you are starting / stopping the recording.

“TELE-FILE NEAR FULL!”

The remaining capacity of the memory label is about 5 % or less, but Tele-File marks are still correctly recorded.

Error messages

“NO TELE-FILE!”

A cassette tape without a memory label has been loaded.

“TELE-FILE FULL!”

The remaining capacity of the memory label has reached

0 %.

“TELE-FILE WRITE PROTECT!”

The memory label is write-protected.

Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label — Tele-File

55

3-4-4 Confirming the Remaining

Capacity on the Memory Label

1

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “Setting the Tele-File mark to be

recorded for the first time after power on” (page 54) to

display the TELE FILE page of the FILE menu.

Notes

• When the memory label is protected from accidental erasure, you cannot clear recorded data.

• The time code data is cleared. However, the memory label ID is not affected.

The remaining capacity of the memory label is displayed on the REMAIN line.

You can record the recording start time code about 130 times on a memory label with a capacity of 1 Kilobyte.

Note

When the remaining capacity of the memory label reaches

0 %, you cannot record the recording start time code any more. “0 %” is displayed on the REMAIN line and the message “MEMORY FULL” is displayed on the STATUS line.

3-4-5 Clearing Recorded Data

1

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “Setting the Tele-File mark to be

recorded for the first time after power on” (page 54) to

display the TELE FILE page of the FILE menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to TELE

FILE CLEAR, then push the MENU knob.

The message “CLEAR DATA OK? YES NO” appears.

In this case, the b

mark is displayed next to “NO” and

“NO” blinks.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to YES

(“YES” blinks), then push the MENU knob.

The data recorded on the memory label is cleared.

100 % appears on the REMAIN line.

56

Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label — Tele-File

3-5 Freezing a Picture

During Playback

Pressing the STOP button during playback stops playback and freezes the picture.

The VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu allows you to set the freeze-frame mode where you can view the frozen picture during playback.

Performing the settings required for freezing the picture

1

Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Setting for recording good shot

marks on the LTC-UBIT area on the tape” (page 39)

to display the VTR MODE page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to STOP

KEY FREEZE, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of STOP KEY FREEZE changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired freeze mode appears.

The freeze mode changes in the following sequence:

OFF y FRAME y FIELD

Setting

OFF

FRAME

FIELD

Contents

Deactivates the freeze function.

Freezes pictures in frame mode. This mode is effective for freezing pictures of objects that are not moving.

Freezes pictures in field mode. This mode is effective for freezing moving pictures.

4

Push the MENU knob.

The ? mark on the left of the setting returns to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of STOP KEY

FREEZE returns to an b

mark.

5

To end menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Viewing frozen pictures

1

Push the PLAY button to start playback.

2

Push the STOP button at the instant when you want to freeze the picture.

The tape stops running and the picture is frozen.

The time code is displayed in the counter display and the PLAY indicator flashes (one flash/second).

Changing to another mode

To cancel the freeze-frame mode for viewing the frozen picture and change to another mode, proceed as follows:

To restart playback: Push the PLAY button.

To search the color picture: Push the F FWD or REW buttons.

To view the pictures shot by the camcorder:

Push the

STOP button.

To rewind the tape: Push the REW button twice.

To fast forward the tape: Push the F FWD button twice.

To eject the tape: Push the EJECT button.

Notes

• In the freeze-frame mode, you cannot start recording pictures on the tape. To start recording the shot pictures again, push the STOP button to finish playback, then push the VTR START button.

• When changing to the recording pause mode from the freeze-frame mode by using the end-search function or positioning function for continuous recording, push the

STOP button first, then push the RET button on the lens.

When remotely controlling the camcorder from an optional RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit

You can perform the same operation from an RM-B150/

B750.

Freezing a Picture During Playback

57

3-6 Setting the Stand-by off Timer During Rec-

Pause

The VTR SAVE/STBY switch allows you to control the

VTR power mode during pauses in recording (rec-pause) or when stopped.

However, even in the standby mode (with the VTR SAVE/

STBY switch set to STBY), you can set the VTR in such a way that the mode is automatically switched from the standby mode to save mode when the tape does not run for a preset time, using the VTR MODE page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

1

Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Setting for recording good shot

marks on the LTC-UBIT area on the tape” (page 39)

to display the VTR MODE page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to STBY

OFF TIMER, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of STBY OFF TIMER changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired STBY OFF TIMER appears.

When you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, STBY OFF TIMER changes in the following sequence: 60MIN y 30MIN y 10MIN y 5MIN y OFF.

In order not to enter in the VTR SAVE mode, select

OFF.

To enter the VTR SAVE mode, select the desired time.

4

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of STBY OFF TIMER returns to an b

mark, and the ? mark to the left of the setting returns to the z mark.

5

To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

58

Setting the Stand-by off Timer During Rec-Pause

Adjustments and

Settings for Recording

Chapter

4

4-1 Adjusting the Black

Balance and the White

Balance

To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder, conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted.

Black balance adjustment

The black balance requires adjustment in the following cases.

• When the camcorder is used for the first time

• When the camcorder has not been used for a long time

• When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly

• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H) values have been changed by using the USER menu

It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off for a while.

White balance adjustment

Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change.

Viewfinder screen displays

If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started, messages that report on the progress and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP

MODE item is set to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu.

For detailed information on the display mode, see “5-2-3

Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation/

Adjustment Progress Messages” on page 85.

Note

Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off.

4-1-1 Adjusting the Black Balance

Adjusting the black balance automatically

In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are performed in the following order: clamp level, black set, and black balance. Manual black balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu.

OUTPUT/DCC switch

AUTO W/B BAL switch

1

Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.

2

Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK and release the switch.

The switch returns to the center position, and the adjustment is executed.

During adjustment, the following message is displayed on the viewfinder screen.

The message changes in the following sequence:

-BLACK SET- t

-BLACK BALANCE-

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

59

The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds with the message “ABB:OK” and the adjustment value is automatically stored in memory.

Notes

• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is closed automatically.

• During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection circuit is activated automatically; so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault.

If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made

If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).

Possible messages are listed below.

Black balance adjustment error messages

Error message Meaning

ABB : NG

IRIS NOT

CLOSED

The lens iris did not close; adjustment was impossible.

ABB : NG

TIME LIMIT

ABB : NG

R (or G or B) :

OVERFLOW

Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts.

The difference between the reference value and the current value is so great that it exceeds the range. Adjustment was impossible.

If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the black balance adjustment.

Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL to BLK until

“-BLACK SET-” appears after “-BLACK BALANCE-” appears. If the error message occurs again, contact your

Sony service representative.

Note

If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.

Black balance memory

Values stored in memory are held until the black balance is adjusted again.

4-1-2 Adjusting the White Balance

Adjusting the white balance automatically

When you make automatic white balance adjustments, the adjustment value obtained is saved in memory.

1

Set the switches and selectors as shown in the following figure.

FILTER selector (step 2)

OUTPUT/DCC switch:

CAM

WHITE BAL switch:

A or B

1)

GAIN selector: Set as low as possible.

1) White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “MEM” on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu.

If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL switch is changed, a message reporting the new setting position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen.

2

Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions as follows:

FILTER selector (outer knob) setting and CC-filter selection

CC filter

C

D

FILTER selector (outer knob) setting

A

B

5600K

3200K

4300K

6300K

3

4

FILTER selector (inner knob) setting and ND-filter selection

ND filter FILTER selector

(inner knob) setting

1

2

Clear

1

/

4

ND

1

/

16

ND

1

/

64

ND

60

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed, a message reporting the setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen (in display mode 3).

3

Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as those for the subject to be shot and zoom in to it.

Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used.

The absolute minimum white area is as follows: adjustment setting is automatically stored in the memory (A or B) that was selected in step 1 using the

WHITE BAL switch.

Approximate color temperature of the subject

Rectangle centered on the screen. The lengths of the sides are 70% of the length and width of the screen.

The white object must be within the rectangle and have an area of at least

10% of the screen.

Note

Make sure there are no bright spots in the rectangle.

4

Adjust the lens iris.

Manually adjusted lens: Set the iris to an appropriate setting.

Lens with automatic iris: Set the automatic/manual switch on the lens to automatic.

5

Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHT and then release the switch.

AUTO W/B BAL switch

The switch returns to the center position, and the adjustment is executed.

During adjustment, the message “AWB :

EXECUTING” is displayed on the viewfinder screen

(in display mode 2 or 3).

The white balance adjustment ends in about 1 second with the message shown in the following figure. The

Note

If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris, the iris may hunt

1)

during the adjustment. To prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S) on the lens.

1) Hunting

Repeated brightening and darkening of the image, resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control.

For details, refer to the lens operating manual of the lens.

If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made

If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).

Possible messages are listed below.

White balance adjustment error messages

Error message

AWB : NG

LOW LEVEL

AWB : NG

COLOR TEMP HIGH

AWB : NG

COLOR TEMP LOW

AWB : NG

TIME LIMIT

AWB : NG

POOR WHITE AREA

AWB : NG

OVER LEVEL

Meaning

The white video level is too low.

Either open the lens iris or increase the gain.

The color temperature is too high.

Select a suitable filter setting.

The color temperature is too low.

Select a suitable filter setting.

Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts.

The white area could not be checked.

The white video level is too high.

Either step down the lens iris or change the ND filter.

If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs again, contact your Sony service representative.

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

61

If you have no time to adjust the white balance

Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.

The white balance is automatically set as follows, depending on the FILTER selector setting.

A: 5600K

B: 3200K

C: 4300K

D: 6300K

For details about setting the white balance automatically,

see “Adjusting the white balance automatically” on page

60.

White balance memory

Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is adjusted again.

There are two sets of white balance memories, A and B, and adjustments for each of the filters can be automatically stored in the memory corresponding to the setting (A or B) of the WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four builtin filters, so a total of eight (4 × 2) adjustments can be stored.

The number of memories allocated to each of A and B can be limited to one without linking to the filter setting by

setting WHT FILTER INH (page 164) to ON on the

FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. In this case, adjustments for each of A and B are stored separately

from the value when WHT FILTER INH (page 164) is set

to OFF.

If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, and on the

FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu, the

WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to ATW, the ATW (Auto

Tracing White) function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions.

4-2 Setting the Electronic

Shutter

This section describes the shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter of the camcorder, and describes the procedure for selecting the shutter speed and shutter mode.

4-2-1 Shutter Modes

The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are shown below.

Standard mode

Use this mode for shooting fast-moving subjects with little blurring.

Frame frequency Shutter speed (sec.)

59.94i

50i

23.98PsF

24PsF

1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,

1/2000

1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,

1/2000

1/32, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/96, 1/125, 1/

250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000

1/32, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/96, 1/125,

1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000

25PsF

29.97PsF

1/33, 1/50, 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,

1/1000, 1/2000

1/40, 1/60, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,

1/1000, 1/2000

ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode

Use this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor screens.

Frame frequency Shutter speed

59.94i

30.00 to 4300 Hz

50i

23.98PsF

25.00 to 4700 Hz

24.00 to 2000 Hz

24PsF

25PsF

29.97PsF

24.00 to 2000 Hz

25.00 to 2100 Hz

30.00 to 2500 Hz

SLS (slow speed shutter) mode (with an optional

HKDW-905R)

The SLS mode can only be selected when an optional

HKDW-905R is installed in the camcorder.

62

Setting the Electronic Shutter

Use this mode for shooting subjects in low level lighting conditions.

You can select the shutter speed from among 1 to 8, 16, 32, and 64 (1/30 to 1/4 sec, 1/2 sec, 1 sec, 2 sec).

EVS (Enhanced Vertical definition System) mode

This mode is used to improved vertical resolution.

However, the sensitivity and dynamic range are reduced.

This mode can be used together with the Standard or ECS mode.

Notes

• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter, the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing shutter speed.

• When automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases, as a result reducing the depth of field.

• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or mercury lamps, the light intensity may appear to be constant, but the red, green, and blue intensities are actually changing in synchronization with the frequency of the power supply, causing flicker. Using an electronic shutter under such lighting could make the flicker even worse. Color flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power supply frequency is 60 Hz. However, if the power frequency is 50 Hz, setting the shutter speed to 1/100 can reduce this flicker.

• When a bright object is shot in EVS mode or ECS mode in such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper edge of the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs. Before using EVS mode or ECS mode, check the shooting conditions.

• The EVS mode is not effective for 23.98PsF, 24PsF,

25PsF, and 29.97PsF formats.

You can turn the EVS mode on or off on the SW STATUS

page of the PAINT menu (page 152).

4-2-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed

Use the SHUTTER selector to select a shutter mode or a standard-mode shutter speed. To set the shutter speed in

ECS or SLS mode, with the SHUTTER selector set to ON and the ECS or SLS

1)

mode selected, use the MENU knob for adjustment.

You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to narrow the range of choice in advance, or to select in advance whether or not you use ECS/SLS.

For details, see “Changing the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings” on page 65.

1) The SLS mode is effective only when an optional HKDW-905R is installed.

Setting the shutter mode and the shutter speed in standard mode

Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off.

1

Follow the procedure described in “5-2-2 Selecting

Display Items” (page 84) to set the VF DISP MODE

item to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu.

2

Push the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT.

SHUTTER selector

The current shutter setting indication appears for about

3 seconds in the viewfinder screen.

Examples: “: SS : 1/250,” “: ECS : 60.00 Hz”

3

Before the shutter setting indication disappears, push the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT again and repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears.

Pushing the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT repeatedly allows you to cycle through the settings of mode and speed preselected on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu.

Note that all modes and all standard-mode speeds listed in the table on the previous page are preselected using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu.

By factory default, all available shutter modes and shutter speeds are displayed in the sequence shown in the following figure. (You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to make a setting so that only the desired – or most frequently used – modes and speeds are displayed.)

Setting the Electronic Shutter

63

Standard mode

1)

SLS mode

2)

ECS mode

1) These shutter speeds in the standard mode are available for 59.94i format.

2) The SLS mode appears only when an optional HKDW-905R is installed in the camcorder.

Setting the shutter speed in ECS mode

Setting the shutter speed in SLS mode

(with an HKDW-905R board installed)

Installing an optional HKDW-905R extension board enables the camcorder to have the Slow Shutter function, which provides ultra high sensitivity. The Slow Shutter function is useful not only for shooting in extremely dark conditions, but also for shooting moving objects with a special afterimage effect.

You can select the slow shutter speed from among 1 to 8,

16, 32, and 64.

1

Set the shutter speed mode to ECS.

Viewfinder screen when ECS is selected

1

Set the shutter speed mode to SLS.

When the camcorder enters the SLS mode, “: SLS :

**FRAME” appears.

“**” indicates the number of frames, and a number from 1 to 64 m the sequence described below is shown.

2

While “:” at the top of the current shutter is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the desired number of frames appears.

If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the number of frames changes in the following sequence: 1 y 2 y 3 y 4 y 5 y

6 y 7 y 8 y 16 y 32 y 64.

Lighting

2

Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera to increase the value, or clockwise to decrease the value, until the desired frequency appears.

For the frequency range, see the table in “ ECS

(Extended Clear Scan) mode” on page 62.

When the ECS mode has already been selected, the currently selected frequency is displayed by pushing the

MENU knob. In this case, you can change the desired frequency only by turning the MENU knob.

When an optional RM-B150/B750 Remote Control

Unit is connected

You can set the shutter speed of ECS with the rotary encoder of the RM-B150/B750.

The number of frames changes.

When SLS mode has already been selected, the currently selected number of frames is displayed by pushing the

MENU knob. In this case, you can change the number of frames only by turning the MENU knob.

Note

You can change the number of frames only when “:” is lit.

The number of frames once selected, is retained, even after the power of the camcorder is turned off.

Notes on using the SLS mode

• When the SLS mode is selected, the following items are limited in functionality.

64

Setting the Electronic Shutter

— AUTO IRIS

The iris setting is locked to OPEN. Adjust the iris setting manually.

— FLARE correction

The setting of FLARE on the SW STATUS page of the PAINT menu is locked to OFF, regardless of the setting.

— AWB

The longer the exposure time, the longer the automatic white balance adjustment time is.

• The following are characteristics of a CCD. They are not malfunctions.

— If you select a large number of frames, white speckles may appear on the CCD.

— When you switch the shutter mode from SS mode to

SLS mode, the picture may blur.

— When you switch the OUTPUT/DCC switch from

BARS to CAM, the picture may blur (only when 50i format is selected).

— If a larger number of frames is selected in SLS mode in a high temperature situation, a flicker may appear on the picture.

— If you switch the GAIN selector position, noise may appear.

For detailed information, consult your Sony dealer.

Changing the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings

You can reduce the time required to select whether you use the ECS mode and the speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance. This can be done by using the SHT

ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu.

Notes

• The SLS mode can be selected only when an optional

HKDW-905R extension board is installed.

• When controlling the camcorder by connecting an optional Remote Control Unit such as RM-B150/B750, you can select all shutter speeds and ECS mode regardless of the setting on the SHT ENABLE page.

MENU knob

MENU ON/OFF switch

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding down the MENU knob.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

OPERATION.

3

Push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu appears.

If the menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

4

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the MENU knob once, and then turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to SHT ENABLE, then push the MENU knob to display the SHT ENABLE page.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the SHT ENABLE page appears, then push the

MENU knob to select the page.

The current setting of each item appears to the right of the item.

5

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the shutter mode or shutter speed you want, then push the

MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

6

Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then push the

MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of the selected item returns to a b

mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting returns to a z mark.

To set another mode or speed, return to step 5.

Note that only the shutter speeds set to ON can be selected with the SHUTTER selector.

7

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Setting the Electronic Shutter

65

The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen.

Note

When you set “SHT DISP MODE” (page 164) to “DEG”

on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the shutter speed indications in seconds (e.g. 1/100) can be changed to degrees (360 is equivalent to shutter OFF).

4-3 Changing the

Reference Value for

Automatic Iris

Adjustment

The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blown-out highlights. The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value.

• 0.25: about 0.25 stop further open

• 0.5: about 0.5 stop further open

• 0.75: about 0.75 stop further open

• 1: about 1 stop further open

• –0.25: about 0.25 stop further closed

• –0.5: about 0.5 stop further closed

• –0.75: about 0.75 stop further closed

• –1: about 1 stop further closed

Changing the reference value

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The page accessed last appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the AUTO IRIS page appears, then push the MENU knob.

66

Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to IRIS

OVERRIDE, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then push the

MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of the selected item returns to a b

mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting returns to a z mark.

The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to ON (factory setting: OFF).

5

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the viewfinder screen.

6

Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value.

Note

When you push the MENU knob in ECS or SLS

1) mode, the camcorder enters a mode where you can change the frequency in the ECS mode or the number of frames in the SLS mode by turning the MENU knob.

1)The SLS mode is effective only when an optional HKDW-905R extension board is installed in the camcorder.

The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off.

Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on.

To open the iris by 0.25 stop:

Turn the MENU knob further counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

One bar (s) appears in the upper part to the left of the

F number in the iris indication.

To open the iris by 0.5 stop:

Turn the MENU knob further counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

One bar (x) appears in the upper part to the left of the

F number in the iris indication.

To open the iris by 0.75 stop:

Turn the MENU knob further counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

Two bars (sx) appear in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication.

To open the iris by 1 stop:

Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

Two bars (xx) appear in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication.

To close the iris by 0.25 stop:

Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

One bar (s) appears in the lower part to the left of the

F number in the iris indication.

To close the iris by 0.5 stop:

Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

One bar (x) appears in the lower part to the left of the

F number in the iris indication.

To close the iris by 0.75 stop:

Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

Two bars (sx) appear in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication.

To close the iris by 1 stop:

Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

Two bars (xx) appear in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication.

Opening the lens iris

Iris opened by 0.25 stop

Iris opened by 0.5 stop

Iris opened by 0.75 stop

Iris opened by 1 stop

Closing the lens iris

Iris closed by 0.25 stop

Iris closed by 0.5 stop

Iris closed by 0.75 stop

Iris closed by 1 stop

When an optional RM-B150/B750 Remote Control

Unit is connected

The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150/B750 can be used for lens iris setting. In this case, the bar display (s) does not appear.

Selecting the automatic iris window

1

Follow steps 1 and 2 in “Changing the reference

value” (page 66) to display the AUTO IRIS page.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to IRIS

WINDOW IND, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of IRIS WINDOW IND changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3

Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then push the

MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

The currently selected auto iris window appears on the screen.

Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment

67

If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on the viewfinder screen, set it to “OFF.”

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to IRIS

WINDOW, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark changes to a ? mark.

5

Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears, then push the MENU knob.

The shaded parts indicate the area where light detection occurs.

Auto iris window

The z mark returns to a b

mark and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

If you select “VAR,” the following items become effective and you can set the window to the desired size. Set each item to the desired size.

Item Setting

IRIS VAR WIDTH The width of the window

IRIS VAR HEIGHT The height of the window

IRIS VAR H POS.

The position of the window in the horizontal direction

IRIS VAR V POS.

The position of the window in the vertical direction

6

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen.

Countering problems with very bright highlights

If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too much, leaving the overall image dark, or the highlights may be blown out. In such cases, setting the highlight clip function to ON reduces the luminance range, avoiding problems from the automatic iris correction.

In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set the CLIP

HIGH LIGHT item to ON.

4-4 Adjusting the Audio

Level

Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to

AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2. You can also adjust the audio level manually.

For the audio level of the signal to be recorded in audio channels 3 and 4

The input levels of audio channels CH-3 and CH-4 are automatically adjusted. Also, you can adjust them manually by setting AUDIO SELECT CH3 and/or AUDIO

SELECT CH4 to MANU on the AUDIO 3 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to CH-3/4, the audio channel level meters display the level of the audio signals recorded in audio channels CH-3 and CH-4. You can select the audio input signals to be recorded for audio channel CH-3 and CH-4 by using the AUDIO IN CH-3/

CH-4 switches.

4-4-1 Manually Adjusting the Audio

Input Level of the AUDIO IN CH-1/

CH-2 Connectors

Use the following procedure to adjust the audio levels of the audio input from the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors, which are to be recorded in audio channels

CH-1 and CH-2.

Note

When 1 and 2 are not displayed under the audio channel level meters, the CH-1/2/ CH-3/4 switch is set to the CH-

3/4 position. Set this switch to CH-1/2.

68

Adjusting the Audio Level

1/CH-2 connectors using REAR1/WRR LEVEL (page

160) and REAR2/WRR LEVEL (page 160) on the

AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

Audio level to

CH-1

Audio level to

CH-2

The factory setting

Example 1 Example 2

LEVEL (CH-1) control

MIC LEVEL control

The MIC LEVEL control is linked with LEVEL (CH-1) control.

LEVEL (CH-2) control

MIC LEVEL control

The MIC LEVEL control is linked with LEVEL (CH-2) control.

MIC LEVEL control

1

Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switches to REAR as follows.

When adjusting the signals of audio channels 1 and

2 input to AUDIO IN CH1/AUDIO IN CH2

connectors: Set both switches to REAR.

When adjusting the signal of either audio channel 1 or 2 input to AUDIO IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2

connector: Set the AUDIO IN switch corresponding to the signal to be adjusted to

REAR.

2

Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) corresponding to the channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.

3

With the LEVEL control for the channel selected in step 1, adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to

–20 dB for a normal input volume.

The second bar from the top may turn on occasionally, but do not allow the top bar (0 dB) to go on. If it goes on, the audio level is too high.

Note

When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the

MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL

(CH-1/CH-2) controls.

4-4-2 Manually Adjusting the Audio

Level of the Front Microphone

You can adjust the audio level input from the front microphone connected to the MIC IN connector, which is to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.

Note

When [1] and [2] are not displayed under the audio channel level meters, the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to the CH-

3/4 position. Set this switch to CH-1/2.

All bars go on.

These bars go on.

Normal input level Excessive input level

Relationships between recording levels and level controls

You can select the audio level controls to be used to adjust the level of the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH-

1

To record stereo sound: Set both AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to FRONT.

Adjusting the Audio Level

69

To record monaural sound: Set the appropriate

AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch corresponding to the channel to which you want to record and adjust the monaural sound signal to FRONT.

For detailed information on stereo or monaural

recording, see “Recording stereo sound” on page 123.

2

Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the desired channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.

3

Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and adjust it so that the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal input volume.

• The 9 bars from the bottom among the 17 bars go on with the normal input volume.

• The second top bar may turn on occasionally, but do not allow the top bar to go on. If it goes on, the audio level is too high.

Note

Even if a stereo microphone is connected, you cannot adjust the levels of the L channel and R channel separately.

Relationships between recording levels and level controls

You can select the audio level controls to be used to adjust the level of the front microphone using MIC CH1 LEVEL

(page 160) and MIC CH2 LEVEL (page 160) on the

AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

Audio level to

CH-1

The factory setting

MIC LEVEL control

Audio level to

CH-2

MIC LEVEL control

Example 1 Example 2

LEVEL (CH-1) control

The MIC LEVEL control is linked with LEVEL

(CH-1) control.

LEVEL (CH-2) control

The MIC LEVEL control is linked with LEVEL

(CH-2) control.

Note

When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and

LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the

LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.

4-4-3 Input Level of Audio Channels

CH-3 and CH-4

Selecting the audio input signals to be recorded

You can select the audio input signal to be recorded for audio channels CH-3 and CH-4 by using the AUDIO IN

CH-3/CH-4 switches.

F: In stereo recording, the audio signal of the L channel is recorded.

In monaural recording, the monaural audio signal is recorded.

R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO

IN CH1 connector is recorded.

W: The audio signal of the wireless microphone is recorded.

F: In stereo recording, the audio signal of the R channel is recorded.

In monaural recording, the monaural audio signal is recorded.

R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO

IN CH2 connector is recorded.

W: The audio signal of the wireless microphone is recorded.

Audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4

Adjusting the audio recording level

Note

When 1 and 2 are displayed under the audio channel level meters, the CH-1/CH-2 /CH-3/CH-4 switch is set to

CH-1/2. Set this switch to CH-3/4.

You can adjust the input level of audio channels CH-3 and

CH-4 by using the AUDIO SELECT CH3, AUDIO

SELECT CH4, LVL CONTROL CH3 and LVL

CONTROL 4 items on the AUDIO-3 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU knob.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

MAINTENANCE, then push the MENU knob.

When the MAINTENANCE menu is used for the first time, the CONTENTS page appears.

Or, if you have used the MAINTENANCE menu before, the page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended appears.

70

Adjusting the Audio Level

3

When the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the

MENU knob once, and then turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to AUDIO-3, then push the MENU knob again.

When any page of the MAINTENANCE menu is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the AUDIO-3 page appears, then push the MENU knob.

The AUDIO-3 page appears.

4

Turn the MENU knob until the audio level meter shows up to -20 dB for a normal input volume.

Turn the MENU knob until these 9 bars go on.

4

Select the method to be used to adjust the audio input level of audio channels CH-3 and CH-4.

To adjust the audio input level automatically

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the channel to be adjusted automatically, then push the

MENU knob.

You can adjust the audio input level between 0 and

100. For normal input volume, 9 bars from the bottom turn on. When the top bar (0 dB) turns on, the audio input level is too high. When the second bar from the top turns on occasionally, this is allowed.

5

Push the MENU knob.

The audio input level of audio channel 3 is set to the level adjusted in step 4.

Adjust the audio input level of audio channel 4 similarly.

5

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

When adjusting the audio input level of audio channel 3

2

Turn the MENU knob to display AUTO, then push the MENU knob.

To adjust the audio input level manually

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the channel to be adjusted manually, then push the

MENU knob.

When adjusting the audio input level of audio channel 3

2

Turn the MENU knob to display MANU, then push the MENU knob.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to LVL

CONTROL CH3, then push the MENU knob.

Adjusting the Audio Level

71

4-5 Setting the Time Data

4-5-1 Setting the Time Code

The time code setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 to 23

: 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds : frames).

HOLD button

RESET button

1

Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.

2

Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.

3

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.

The first (leftmost) digit of time code flashes.

4

Using the SHIFT and ADVANCE buttons, set the time code.

SHIFT: Selects a digit to set. Each time you press the button, the flashing digit moves one column to the right.

Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button moves the flashing digit one column to the left.

ADVANCE: Increments the value of the flashing digit.

Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button decrements the flashing digit.

To reset the time code value to 00:00:00:00

Press the RESET button.

5

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-

RUN.

F-RUN: Free run. The time code generator keeps running.

R-RUN: Recording run. The time code generator runs only while recording.

To set drop frame mode/non-drop frame mode

You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-drop

frame (NDF) mode on the FUNCTION 1 page (page 145)

of the OPERATION menu or on the TIMECODE page

(page 161) of the MAINTENANCE menu.

Note

This function is effective only when the 59.94i and

29.97PsF frame frequency is selected.

To make the time code consecutive

When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the tape normally produces consecutive time code. However, once you remove the tape and record on another tape, the time code will no longer be contiguous when you use the original tape again for recording. In this case, to make the time code consecutive, proceed as follows:

1

Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN.

2

Use the PLAY button to play back.

3

Watching the playback, find the point of the previous recording on the tape from which you wish to continue recording, then push the STOP button.

4

Press the RET button on the lens.

This reads the previous recording and synchronizes the internal time code generator, as a result allowing the new time code recorded to continue consecutively.

4-5-2 Saving the Actual Time in the

Time Code

Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the actual time in the time code.

When it is necessary to set the actual time, use the TIME/

DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.

For details, see “5-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the

Internal Clock” on page 98.

72

Setting the Time Data

4-5-3 Setting the User Bits

By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you can record user information such as the date, time, or scene number on the time code track.

The user bit data set will be recorded for both LTC and

VITC.

Storing the user bit setting in memory

The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off.

HOLD button

RESET button

4-5-4 Synchronizing the Time Code

You can synchronize the internal time code generator of this camcorder with an external generator for the regeneration of an external time code. You can also synchronize the time code generators of other camcorders/

VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder.

Connections for time code synchronization

Connect both the reference video signal and the external time code as illustrated below.

Example 1: Synchronizing with an external time code

1

Set the DISPLAY switch to DATA.

2

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.

3

Set the DATA DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.

4

Set the user bits by using the SHIFT and ADVANCE buttons.

SHIFT: Selects a digit to set. Each time you press the button, the flashing digit moves one column to the right. Pressing this button while holding down the

HOLD button moves the flashing digit one column to the left.

ADVANCE: Increments the value of the flashing digit. Pressing this button while holding down the

HOLD button decrements the flashing digit.

Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as follows:

Hexadecimal

Display

A

A

B b

C

C

D d

E

E

F

F

To reset the user bit data to 00:00:00:00

Press the RESET button.

5

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-

RUN, corresponding to the desired operating mode for the time code generator.

GENLOCK IN

1)

Reference video signal

TC IN

External time code

1) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page (page 164) of

the MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.

Setting the Time Data

73

Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders for time code synchronization

TEST OUT

TC OUT

TC IN

GENLOCK IN

1)

TC OUT

TEST OUT

GENLOCK IN

1)

TC IN

TC OUT

TEST OUT

Reference camcorder

To another camcorder to be synchronized

1) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page (page 164) of

the MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.

Procedure for time code synchronization

1

Set the POWER switch to ON.

2

Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.

3

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.

4

Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.

5

Supply a time code signal and a reference video signal complying with the SMPTE standard to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector, respectively.

This operation synchronizes the internal time code generator with the external time code. After about 10 seconds, you can disconnect the external time code without losing the synchronization. However, there will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or disconnect the time code signal during recording.

Notes

• When you finish the above procedure, the internal time code is immediately synchronized with the external time code and the counter display will show the value of the external time code. However, wait for a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.

• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the frame frequency of the camcorder, the camcorder neither can be correctly genlocked nor can operate correctly. In such a case, the internal time code is not correctly synchronized with the external time code.

• When the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to OFF on the

GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu (page

164), the time code cannot be synchronized with the

reference video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK item to ON on the GENLOCK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

User bit settings during time code synchronization

When the time code is synchronized, only the time data is synchronized with the external time code value. Therefore, the user bits can have their own settings for each camcorder.

To synchronize the user bits with external user bit data, set

the EXT-LK UBIT item on the TIMECODE page (page

161) of the MAINTENANCE menu to EXT.

To release the time code synchronization

First disconnect the external time code, then set the F-

RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.

To change the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during time code synchronization

To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack. You may lose time code synchronization if you remove the battery pack first.

Camera synchronization during time code synchronization

During time code synchronization, the camera is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the

GENLOCK IN connector.

74

Setting the Time Data

Menu Displays and

Detailed Settings

Chapter

5

5-1 Menu Organization and Operation

The page number displayed on the top line of the menu may be different if an optional extension board is installed.

TOP menu

The menus of the camcorder are composed of submenus classified into categories according to the frequency of use, purpose of use and so on. The TOP menu allows you to select the desired submenus.

To display TOP menu screen

While holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/

OFF switch from the OFF position to the ON position.

5-1-1 Menu Organization

The following shows the organization of menus that you can use to make various settings and adjustments.

TOP menu

USER submenu

1)

OUTPUT SEL page

FUNCTION 1 page

VF DISP 1 page

VF DISP 2 page

‘!’ LED page

MARKER 1 page

GAIN SW page

VF SETTING page

AUTO IRIS page

SHOT ID page

SHOT DISP page

SET STATUS page

USER FILE page

LENS FILE page

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE submenu

ALL submenu

• OPERATION submenu

• PAINT submenu

• MAINTENANCE submenu

• FILE submenu

• DIAGNOSIS submenu

Just as with the USER submenu, each submenu is composed of pages. On these pages you can make various settings and adjustments. Some pages have a window for more settings. This manual refers to these submenus as the menu.

1) In this manual, the USER menu consisting of items and pages registered at the factory is used. You can use the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu to add or delete pages according to how the camcorder is being used.

For details, see “5-1-3 Editing the USER Menu” on page

78.

Note

Depending on the internal switch settings, display of the

TOP menu may be disabled.

For details, ask your Sony service representative.

Submenus selected in the TOP menu

The following menus can be selected from the TOP menu.

• USER menu

This menu includes monitor output settings, viewfinder settings, and commonly used functions. This menu is normally displayed when the MENU ON/OFF switch is changed to ON.

• USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu

This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from the USER menu to suit your needs.

You can add or delete menu items on the USER 1 to USER

19 pages. Also, you can add functions to be assigned to the assignable switches (UA01 to UA10).

• ALL menu

This menu contains all the items of the OPERATION menu, PAINT menu, MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu and DIAGNOSIS menu.

Menu Organization and Operation

75

• OPERATION menu

This menu contains items for changing settings according to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is being operated.

• PAINT menu

This menu contains items for making detailed image adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the camera. Support of a video engineer is usually required to use this menu. Although you can also use an external remote control panel or master setup unit to set the items on this menu, this menu is effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors.

• MAINTENANCE menu

This menu contains items for performing camera maintenance operations, such as changing the system, or using infrequently used “paint” items.

• FILE menu

This menu is for performing file operations, such as writing the reference file.

• DIAGNOSIS menu

This menu enables you to confirm the VTR status or identify a failed circuit board.

Returning to the TOP menu from other menus

There are two methods for returning to the TOP menu.

• Align the b

mark with “TOP” at the top right of the menu page, then push the MENU knob.

TOP will always be displayed at the top right of the menu page once following setting is made: while holding the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON to display the TOP menu.

• Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to the

ESCAPE position repeatedly until the TOP menu appears.

MENU knob

CANCEL/PRST/

ESCAPE switch

MENU ON/OFF switch

Switch cover

This section explains operations on the USER menu as an example. Operations for other menus are the same as those on the USER menu. Also, if optional extension boards are not installed in your camcorder, some items on the USER menu pages are not displayed.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

A USER menu page normally appears.

When the USER menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears. In this case, go to step 2.

Example:

5-1-2 Basic Menu Operations

When you open the cover of the menu operating section, the MENU ON/OFF switch appears. If the MENU ON/

OFF switch is set to ON, the menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen. Closing the cover automatically sets the

MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

When this is the first time the USER menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu appears. In this case, follow the procedure below.

Or, you can access the desired page from the

CONTENTS page by going to step 2 instead of performing the operations in steps 1 and 2.

1

Push the MENU knob once, then turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired page number.

76

Menu Organization and Operation

This indicates that the menu screen can be scrolled downwards.

This indicates that the menu screen can be scrolled upwards.

b mark

2

Push the MENU knob.

The selected page is displayed.

Go to step 4.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.

3

Push the MENU knob.

A b

mark appears on the left of the item currently selected on the page.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired item.

• Turning the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera moves the b

mark up continuously.

• Turning the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera moves the b

mark down continuously.

5

Push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

The menu display changes to the setting screen where you can change the settings.

6

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting.

To increase a setting value

Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

To decrease a setting value

Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera.

When you turn the MENU knob, the setting increases or decreases one step at a time.

If you turn the knob quickly, the numeric value changes rapidly. If you turn it slowly, you can make minor adjustments.

To toggle a setting on or off

Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

Each turning operation of the knob toggles the ON and

OFF settings.

To cancel the setting/to reset the setting to the initial setting

You can cancel the setting and reset it to its initial value

(one set at the factory, or a preset value) by pushing the

CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/

PRST before pushing the MENU knob in step 7.

1

Set the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to

CANCEL/PRST.

The message “CANCEL DATA OK?” appears.

2

To cancel the previous setting: Push the

CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/

PRST.

3

To reset the setting to the initial value: Push the

CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/

PRST once more. After the message “PRESET

DATA OK?” appears, push the CANCEL/PRST /

ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST again.

The setting is reset to the initial value.

The action of the CANCEL/PRST function differs for some setting items. Some items are only affected by

PRST. Check the setting procedure for each item for more information.

To interrupt the settings change operation

By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF, the menu disappears from the screen. By setting the

MENU ON/OFF switch to ON again, the values that were displayed when you interrupted the setting operations will reappear so you can continue making settings.

7

Push the MENU knob.

Menu Organization and Operation

77

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark. The setting is confirmed.

8

To continue setting other items on the same page, repeat steps 4 to 7.

Moving to another page

1

When the b

mark is placed at a position of items other than the page number, turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the page number, then push the MENU knob.

When the z mark is positioned on the left side of the item and a ? mark is positioned on the left of the setting, push the MENU knob once to remove the setting mode. Then turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the page number, then push the MENU knob.

5-1-3 Editing the USER Menu

The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and items that you need, by adding, deleting or replacing pages.

Adding a new page

The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add a new page to the USER menu.

While the USER 1 EDIT page contains factory-preset items, the USER 2 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages and the

ASSIGN EDIT page are all blank in their initial state. You can register up to 10 items, including blank lines, on each of these pages.

1

While holding down the MENU knob, move the

MENU ON/OFF switch from the OFF position to the

ON position.

The TOP menu appears.

Or, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to

ESCAPE when the b

mark is placed at a position of items other than the page number.

A ? mark appears in front of the page number. The camcorder is now in page selecting mode.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.

3

Push the MENU knob when the desired page appears.

To end menu operations

You can end menu operations using one of the following two methods:

• Turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

• Close the switch cover of the menu operating section.

When you close the switch cover, the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF automatically.

The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen (when the viewfinder DISPLAY switch is set to ON or the VF DISP item on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu is set to

ON).

For details of the viewfinder display, see “5-2-2 Selecting

Display Items” on page 84.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to USER

MENU CUSTOMIZE, then push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the menu appears.

If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

3

When the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the

MENU knob once, and then turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired page number from among USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT and ASSIGN

EDIT. Then push the MENU knob.

Or, turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears, then push the MENU knob.

78

Menu Organization and Operation

Example: When you want to select the USER 2 EDIT page

To change the order of items on a page

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item to be replaced, then push the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the position where you want to move the item, then push the MENU knob.

4

Move the b

mark to Add New Item (this operation is unnecessary if no item exists on the page as shown in the figure for step 3), then push the MENU knob.

The page for the last added item appears.

5

Add the items.

1

Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the desired items appears, then push the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired item, then push the MENU knob.

The USER 2 EDIT page appears again, displaying the newly added item.

6

To add the remaining items, repeat steps 4 to 6.

You can add up to 10 items on one page.

To delete items from a page

You can delete items from any of the USER 1 EDIT to

USER 19 EDIT pages.

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item to be deleted.

2

Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to

CANCEL/PRST.

The message “DELETE ITEM OK?” appears.

3

Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to

CANCEL/PRST again.

The item is deleted.

The item selected in step 1 moves to the position that you selected in step 2.

In the above example, MASTER BLACK will be moved to the top and the other items are moved down one line.

To insert a blank line

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the position where you want to insert a blank row, and push and hold the MENU knob for about 3 seconds.

A blank row is inserted.

Push and hold the

MENU knob for about

3 seconds.

In the above example, a blank row is inserted between

MASTER BLACK and WHITE <B> CH.

Note

You cannot insert a blank row on a page where 10 items have been already registered.

Adding/deleting/replacing pages

You can add a new page to the USER menu, delete a page from the USER menu, or replace pages, using the EDIT

PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.

Menu Organization and Operation

79

To add a page

1

Follow steps 1, 2, and 3 in “ Adding a new page” on

page 78 to display the EDIT PAGE page of the USER

MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to Add New

Page, then push the MENU knob.

The selection screen appears.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired page, then push the MENU knob.

The selected page is added to the last page of the

USER menu.

To cancel adding a page

Before pressing the MENU knob in step 3, turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to ESC at the top right of the screen, then push the MENU knob.

The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.

To delete a page

1

Follow steps 1, 2, and 3 in “ Adding a new page” on

page 78 to display the EDIT PAGE page of the USER

MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the page to be deleted.

3

Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to

CANCEL/PRST.

The message “DELETE PAGE OK?” appears.

4

Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to

CANCEL/PRST again.

In the above example, the VF DISP 2 page will be deleted.

To change the order of pages

1

Follow steps 1, 2, and 3 in “ Adding a new page” on

page 78 to display the EDIT PAGE page of the USER

MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the page that you want to move.

The b

mark changes to a z mark.

The message “PUSH TO PAGE INSERT” appears at the right top of the screen.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the position where you want to move the page selected in step 1.

4

Push the MENU knob.

The page selected in step 2 is moved to the position selected in step 3.

In the above example, AUTO IRIS will be moved to the 04 position and the ‘!’ LED and following items will be moved down one line.

5-1-4 Adding Functions to be

Assigned to Assignable Switches

You can add items to be assigned to assignable switches using the ASSIGN EDIT page of the USER MENU

CUSTOMIZE menu.

1

Follow steps 1, 2, and 3 in “Adding a new page” on

page 78 to display the ASSIGN EDIT window of the

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.

80

Menu Organization and Operation

2

Move the b

mark to Add New Item (this operation is unnecessary, if no item exists on the page as shown in the figure for step 1), then push the MENU knob.

3

Add the desired items.

1

Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the desired items appears, then push the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired item, then push the MENU knob.

The ASSIGN EDIT window appears again, displaying the newly added item.

4

To add the remaining items, repeat steps 2 and 3.

You can add up to 10 items.

To delete items or to change the order of items

You can delete items from the page or change the order of items on the page by following the same operations as those for adding a new page.

Note

You cannot add a blank line.

For details, see “To delete items from a page” on page 79 and “To change the order of items on a page” on page 79.

Menu Organization and Operation

81

5-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc.

When the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF and the

DISPLAY switch is set to ON, the items for which an

“ON” setting was made in the VF DISP 1 page of the

USER menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen. Messages that give details of the settings and adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear for about 3 seconds while settings are being changed, during adjustment, and after adjustment.

For information about display item selection, see “5-2-2

Selecting Display Items” on page 84.

For information about setting change and adjustment

progress messages, see “5-2-3 Display Modes and Setting

Change Confirmation/Adjustment Progress Messages” on page 85.

For information about marker display, see “5-2-5 Setting

Marker Display” on page 87.

5-2-1 Layout of the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown below.

a Extender b Zoom position c Color temperature d UHF wireless microphone reception level e DC IN / battery voltage or remaining capacity u Freeze mix indication t Model name and serial number s Date and time r ID number q Time code p 5600K indication f * indicator g Setting change and adjustment progress

message display area

h Operation/error message display area i Iris setting/auto iris override j Remaining tape k Audio level l Shutter speed m Gain n White balance memory o Filter

6 , qk, ql and w; appear only when color bars are displayed.

a Extender

“EX” is displayed when a lens extender is used.

b Zoom position

This indicator appears only when you use a lens that has a zoom position display function. It indicates the approximate position of the variator

1)

of the zoom lens, between wide angle and telephoto.

1) Variator

A group of lenses that are moved to adjust the focal length.

82

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

c Color temperature

This indicates the currently selected color temperature.

d UHF wireless microphone reception level

This indicates the reception level of the wireless microphone when the UHF wireless microphone is attached, using four x which appear at the right of “W.”

When all four x are lit, the reception is good.

e DC IN / battery voltage or remaining capacity

This shows the battery voltage or remaining capacity of an internal battery pack.

When the power is supplied from an AC adaptor connected to the DC IN connector, “DC IN” appears.

When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to “INT” or

“AUTO” on the VF DISP 2 page of the USER menu, the remaining battery capacity is automatically detected and indicated as a percentage when the Anton Bauer intelligent battery system or the BP-GL65/GL95 battery pack is used.

The indicated value changes in steps of 10%.

• Until the remaining battery capacity is reduced to 40%, the indications MAX, 90%, 80%...40% are displayed for

3 seconds in the viewfinder each time the remaining battery capacity reduces by 10%.

1)

• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 40%, the indication is displayed all the time.

• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 10%

2)

, the indication flashes. When the remaining battery capacity is reduced further, the LOW indication flashes.

1) When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to “AUTO,” the remaining capacity of the battery is displayed all the time.

When VOLT is selected, or even when AUTO is selected, if the remaining battery capacity cannot be detected is used, the battery voltage is displayed.

2) This value can be set to either 10% or 20% on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu.

f * indicator

This flashes when the color bars are displayed and is recorded together with the color bars.

g Setting change and adjustment progress message

display area

For details, see “5-2-3 Display Modes and Setting Change

Confirmation/Adjustment Progress Messages” on page 85.

h Operation/error message display area

For details, see “Operation/error messages” on page 140.

i Iris setting/auto iris override

This indicates the f-stop (iris setting) of the lens.

Also, the auto iris override is displayed using bars which appear in the upper and lower parts of the screen, to the left of the F number respectively.

For details, see “4-3 Changing the Reference Value for

Automatic Iris Adjustment” on page 66.

j Remaining tape

This indicator indicates the remaining tape recording time

(in minutes) of the VTR.

Examples of remaining tape recording time indication

Indication

F – 30

30 – 25

25 – 20

20 – 15

15 – 10

10 – 5

5 – 0

5 – 0 (flashing)

Remaining tape recording time

Full to 30 minutes

30 to 25 minutes

25 to 20 minutes

20 to 15 minutes

15 to 10 minutes

10 to 5 minutes

5 to 2 minutes

2 to 0 minutes k Audio level

These items indicate the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2. The peak indication of the VTR level meter is related as follows to the audio level when a 1-kHz sine wave is input.

Audio channel 1 level indicator

Audio channel 2 level indicator

VTR level meter indicator l Shutter speed

This indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.

However, if the SHUTTER selector is set to OFF, nothing is displayed.

1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000: Shutter speed

(in seconds) in standard mode

ECS: ECS mode

EVS: EVS mode

1F to 8F, 16F, 32F, 64F: Number of frames in SLS mode

1)

1) The SLS mode is effective only when an optional HKDW-905R extension board is installed.

m Gain

This indicates the gain of the video amplifier, as set by the

GAIN selector.

n White balance memory

This indicates the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory.

A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A.

B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B.

P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.

T: Displayed when ATW is being used.

When an optional RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit is connected, you can switch the memory using the switch on the RM-B150/B750.

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

83

o Filter

This indicates the currently selected filter types.

p 5600K indication

This appears when the electric 5600K color temperature filter function has been activated on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu.

When AWB is executed for shooting an object of high color temperature, and 5600K may be set to ON automatically.

q Time code

This indicates the time code, user bits, or other information selected by the DISPLAY switch and DATA DISPLAY switch settings.

For more information, see “Relationships between the

DISPLAY switch and DATA DISPLAY switch settings and the time counter displays” on page 33.

r ID number

This indicates the ID number selected, from ID 1 to ID 4.

The ID number is recorded together with the color bars.

s Date and time

This indicates the date and time of recording, which are recorded together with the color bars.

t Model name and serial number

This indicates the model name and serial number of the camcorder, which are recorded together with the color bars.

u Freeze mix indication

This indicates the type of the freeze-frame picture displayed by using the Freeze Mix function.

FREZ: A freeze-frame picture of the video from the camera

MIX: The freeze-frame picture obtained by the Freeze

Mix function and the video currently being input from the camera are mixed.

For details, see “5-3-11 Using the Freeze Mix Function” on page 104.

5-2-2 Selecting Display Items

To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen from the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu, turn the indication next to each item on or off.

MENU knob

CANCEL/PRST /

ESCAPE switch

MENU ON/OFF switch

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP

2 page appears, then push the MENU knob to select that page.

The current setting is displayed on the right of each item.

You can select the following items to be displayed on the screen on the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page.

VF DISP 1 page

Item

VF DISP

Description

Turning the viewfinder display on or off

1)

VF DISP MODE

Selecting the display mode

2)

DISP EXTENDER Extender indicator

DISP FILTER

DISP WHITE

DISP 5600K

DISP GAIN

DISP SHUTTER

DISP AUDIO

DISP TAPE

Types of ND and CC filters

White balance memory indicator

5600K indicator

Gain indicator

Shutter speed and ECS mode indicator

Audio level indicator

Remaining tape indicator

1) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the

DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder.

2) For detailed information on the display mode, see “5-2-3 Display

Modes and Setting Change Confirmation/Adjustment Progress

Messages” on page 85.

84

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

VF DISP 2 page

Item

DISP IRIS

DISP ZOOM

Description

Iris opening indicator

Zoom position indicator

Displays the color temperature.

DISP COLOR

TEMP.

DISP BATT

REMAIN

Displays the battery voltage/ remaining capacity of an internal battery pack or an external battery connected to the DC IN connector.

DISP DC IN Displayed when the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the DC IN connector.

DISP WRR RF LVL Displays the reception level of the wireless microphone.

DISP TIME CODE Displays the time code.

DISP FREEZE Displays the type of freeze-frame picture.

1)

1) For detailed information on the type of freeze-frame picture, see “5-

3-11 Using the Freeze Mix Function” on page 104.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to select whether the selected item should appear in the viewfinder display (the ON setting), or not appear (the “OFF” setting), then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

Note that pushing the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST on this page has no effect.

5

To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

5-2-3 Display Modes and Setting

Change Confirmation/Adjustment

Progress Messages

You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of setting changes and adjustment progress and results by setting a display mode.

The conditions under which messages are displayed and their correspondence with the display mode are as follows:

Setting change confirmation/adjustment progress messages and display modes

Y: Message is displayed.

N: Message is not displayed.

Message display conditions

Message Display mode setting

1 2 3

N N Y When the filter selection has been changed

ND : n, CC : m

(where n = 1, 2, 3, 4, m = A, B, C, D)

When the gain setting has been changed

GAIN : n (where n =

–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB,

9 dB,12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB,

30 dB, 36 dB, 42 dB)

N N Y

N N Y When the setting of the

WHITE BAL switch has been changed

WHITE : n

(where n = A CH, B CH,

PRESET) or ATW : RUN

When the

OUTPUT/DCC switch has been set to DCC ON or OFF

DCC : ON (or OFF) N Y Y

When the shutter speed and mode setting has been changed

1)

SS : 1/100 (or 1/125,

1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,

1/2000, ECS, SLS)

2)

When the black or white balance has been adjusted

E.g. AWB : OK (For

details, see “4-1

Adjusting the Black

Balance and the White

Balance” on page 59.)

N Y Y

N Y Y

1) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER selector is set to ON.

2) The shutter speed displayed depends on the selected frame frequency. For

details, see “4-2-1 Shutter Modes” on page 62.

Changing the display mode

You can change the display mode on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu.

1

Follow steps 1 and 2 in “5-2-2 Selecting Display

Items” (page 84), until the VF DISP 1 page of the

USER menu appears on the screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to “VF

DISP MODE,” then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of VF DISP MODE changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3

Turn the MENU knob until the desired display mode appears, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

85

4

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

5-2-4 Selecting the Items for Which the ‘!’ LED is to Light

The ‘!’ LED page of the OPERATION menu allows you to select the items for which the ‘!’ indicator is to light up on the viewfinder screen. Also, the ‘!’ LED STD page allows you to select the lighting conditions.

MENU knob

CANCEL/PRST /

ESCAPE switch

MENU ON/OFF switch

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding down the MENU knob.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

OPERATION, then push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu appears.

If the menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

3

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the MENU knob once, then turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to ‘!’ LED, then push the MENU knob again to display the ‘!’ LED page.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the ‘!’ LED page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

Item

GAIN

SHUTTER

WHITE BAL

5600K

ATW

EXTENDER

FILTER

OVERRIDE

FORMAT

Contents

Lights when the gain is set to anything but 0 dB.

Lights when the SHUTTER selector is set to anything but

1/48.

Lights when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.

Lights when the 5600K mode is set to ON.

Lights when ATW is being used.

Lights when the lens extender is used.

Lights when the FILTER selector is set to anything but ND:1/CC:B.

Lights when the reference value of the auto iris adjustment is other than the standard value.

Lights when the frame frequency is set to other than 23.98PsF.

4

Perform the settings for each item.

1

Turn the MENU knob to move b

mark to the item you want to set, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

2

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, then push the MENU knob.

3

To continue setting other items, repeat steps 1 and

2

.

You can change the criteria for whether the ‘!’ indicator lights or does not light on the ‘!’ LED STD page.

To change the criteria, go to step 5.

If you don’t want to change the criteria, go to step 8.

5

Move the b

mark to the page number, then push the

MENU knob. Or when the b

mark is located at the left of the item, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to ESCAPE.

6

Turn the MENU knob until the ‘!’ LED STD page appears, then push the MENU knob.

The following table shows operations under the condition where ‘!’ LED STD has been pre-adjusted at the factory.

86

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

Item

GAIN

SHUTTER

WHITE BAL

5600K

ATW

EXTENDER

FILTER ND

FILTER CC

OVERRIDE

FORMAT

Description

GAIN switch position L, M, H, or

0 dB

Shutter mode OFF, ECS, SLS

1)

,

1/33

2)

White balance automatic adjustment memory, P (PRST), A,

B, PA, PB, or AB

5600K mode ON or OFF

ATW ON or OFF

Extender ON or OFF

ND Types of the ND filter, 1, 2, 3, or 4

CC Types of the CC filter, A, B, C, or D

ON or OFF when the reference value of the auto iris adjustment is other than the standard value

Frame frequency: 59.94i, 50i,

23.98PsF, 24PsF, 25PsF, or

29.97PsF

1) The SLS mode is effective only when an optional HKDW-905R extension board is installed.

2) Depending on the frame frequency currently selected.

For details, see “4-2-1 Shutter Modes” on page 62.

7

Perform the settings for each item.

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

2

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, then push the MENU knob.

3

To continue setting other items, repeat steps 1 and

2

.

8

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

When you change the settings only on the ‘!’ LED page

The ‘!’ LED page is also registered in the USER menu.

You can access this page without opening the TOP page.

Open the USER menu by pressing the MENU ON/OFF switch and display this page from the USER menu.

5-2-5 Setting Marker Display

The MARKER 1 page of the USER menu allows you to switch the display of the center and safety zone markers on or off and to select the area indicated by the safety zone marker.

MENU knob

CANCEL/PRST /

ESCAPE switch

MENU ON/OFF switch

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the MARKER 1 page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

You can set the following items on the MARKER 1 page.

Item

MARKER

CENTER

CENTER

MARK

SAFETY

ZONE

SAFETY

AREA

Description

When you do not want to display all markers, set to OFF.

To display the center marker, set to ON.

Selects the type of center marker (1 to

4), when CENTER is set to ON.

To display the safety zone, set to ON.

ASPECT

ASPECT

SELECT

ASPECT

MASK

1)

ASPECT

MASK LVL

100%

MARKER

Selects the safety zone range (80%,

90%, 92.5% or 95%), when SAFETY

ZONE is set to ON.

To display the aspect marker, set to ON.

Selects the type (15:9, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3,

1.85, 2.35) of the aspect marker.

To make the areas out of the selected aspect marker dimmer, set to ON.

Sets the mask level (0 to 8), when the

ASPECT MASK is set to ON.

To display the effective pixel area, set to

ON.

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

87

1) The ASPECT MASK item is for processing the signal to be output to the viewfinder. When R, G, or B is selected for the OUTPUT

SELECT item from the menu, the masked video signal is output to the TEST OUT connector.

3

Perform the settings for each item.

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

2

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of the selected item returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark on the left of the setting returns to a z mark.

4

To continue setting other items, repeat step 3.

5

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

5-2-6 Setting the Viewfinder

The VF SETTING page of the USER menu allows you to select items related to the viewfinder.

1

MENU knob

CANCEL/PRST /

ESCAPE switch

MENU ON/OFF switch

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the VF SETTING page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

Item

ZEBRA

Description

Turns the zebra display on or off.

1)

ZEBRA SELECT Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or

BOTH.

ZEBRA1 DET. LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 1

(factory setting: 70%) display.

ZEBRA2 DET. LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 2

(factory setting: 100%) display.

ASPECT Selects the viewfinder aspect ratio.

VF DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the sharpness of the viewfinder.

2)

Turns the VF detail function on or off and adjusts the level (–99 to

99).

VF DTL H LEVEL Adjusts the VF H detail level (–99 to 99).

VF DTL V LEVEL Adjusts the VF V detail level (–99 to 99).

1) When you use a viewfinder that is not equipped with a ZEBRA switch, turn the display on or off using this item. When you use a viewfinder with a ZEBRA switch, the most recent operation of the

ZEBRA switch and this menu operation will be effective.

2) The sharpness setting at the viewfinder does not affect the recorded image.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

5

To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

5-2-7 Recording Shot Data

Superimposed on the Color Bars

The SHOT DISP page of the USER menu allows you to select which shot data is recorded superimposed on the

88

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

color bars. You can also select which of the shot IDs (1 to

4) set in the SHOT DISP page is recorded superimposed on the picture.

MENU knob

CANCEL/PRST /

ESCAPE switch

MENU ON/OFF switch

4

Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to record the selected item superimposed on the color bars, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

5

To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Carrying out superimposed recording

To actually record the items selected for superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page, set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to BARS.

The items selected for superimposed recording appear on the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color bars.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT DISP page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

Item Description

SHOT DATE Selects whether or not the shot date is superimposed (ON or OFF).

SHOT TIME Selects whether or not shot time is superimposed (ON or OFF).

SHOT MODEL

NAME

Selects whether or not the model name is superimposed (ON or OFF).

SHOT SERIAL

NO

Selects whether or not the serial number is superimposed (ON or OFF).

SHOT ID SEL Selects whether or not the shot ID set on the SHOT ID

1)

page is superimposed (1 to 4 or OFF).

SHOT BLINK

CHARA

Selects whether or not a blinking * is superimposed (ON or OFF).

1) To carry out superimposed recording, select the SHOT ID number (1 to 4). To record without superimposing the SHOT ID, select “OFF.”

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

5-2-8 Setting the Shot ID

On the SHOT ID page of the USER menu, you can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and symbols.

When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS, this shot

ID is output with the color bar signal. The shot ID comprises ID1 to ID4, and you can select the SHOT ID to be recorded using the SHOT DISP page.

For detailed information on the OUTPUT/DCC switch

position, see “OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast control) switch” on page 24.

Note

When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed, even if the color bar signal is output.

MENU knob

CANCEL/PRST /

ESCAPE switch

MENU ON/OFF switch

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The menu page accessed last appears on the screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT ID page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

89

Example: To change “S” to “D”

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the ID

(one of ID-1 to ID-4) you want to set, then push the

MENU knob.

The window used to enter the shot ID appears.

A v

mark appears over the first character position in the string, and characters can now be input.

Move the v mark to D.

D appears under the ? mark.

Push the MENU knob.

The ? mark changes to a v mark.

To enter a space

Move the v

mark over the INS, then push the MENU knob. The space is entered in the position under the ? mark on the character entry row.

When there is a character under the ? mark, subsequent characters move to the right one at a time.

4

Enter or change the shot ID.

When you are entering the whole shot ID, go to step

2

.

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the v

mark to the character that you want to change, then push the

MENU knob.

The v

mark changes to a ? mark and the character table appears.

The v

mark moves to the character table.

Move the v mark over

INS.

Push the MENU knob.

Space

2

Turn the MENU knob until the v

mark moves to the character position that you want to select, then push the MENU knob.

Move the v

mark over RET, then push the MENU knob. The ? mark over the space on the character entry row changes to a v

mark.

To delete a character

Move the v

mark over DEL, then push the MENU knob. The character under the ? mark is deleted and the subsequent characters move to the left one at a time.

To cancel deletion of the character

Move the v

mark over RET, then push the MENU knob. The ? mark on the character entry row changes to a v

mark.

5

To enter any remaining characters, repeat step 4.

90

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

6

When you finish entering characters, turn the MENU knob to move the v

mark over END, then push the

MENU knob.

The character setting mode is cleared and the SHOT

ID page appears.

To cancel entering or changing a shot ID

Before executing step 6 of the procedure for setting the shot ID, move the b

mark to “ESC” at the top right of the screen, then push the MENU knob or push the CANCEL/

PRST / ESCAPE switch down to ESCAPE.

This cancels all changes, and returns to the SHOT ID page.

OFF of the output of the BNC connectors (such as TEST

OUT and HD-SDI OUT connectors).

AUDIO STATUS window

5-2-9 Displaying the Status

Confirmation Windows

You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on the screen by displaying the following three windows.

• ABNORMAL <!> window

• FUNCTION window

• AUDIO STATUS window

Indications on the windows

ABNORMAL <!> window

This window allows you to confirm the following items related to audio.

• ON/OFF of EMPHASIS, setting criteria for DF/NDF and FRONT MIC MONO/STEREO

• Type of input signal input to audio channels CH1/CH2/

CH3/CH4

• Input level of audio channels CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4

You can use the SET STATUS page of the USER menu to set whether or not the status confirmation windows are displayed.

Displaying the status confirmation windows

You can use the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch as the

STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF (when the cover of the menu operating section is closed, OFF is automatically selected).

This window allows you to confirm why the (warning) indicator lights.

You can use the ‘!’ LED page of the USER menu to set whether or not the (warning) indicator lights.

For details, see “5-2-4 Selecting the Items for Which the ‘!’

LED is to Light” on page 86.

FUNCTION window

By pushing the STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch up to ON/SEL, the confirmation window appears.

Each time you push this switch up to

ON/SEL, the window switches. After 10 seconds, the window disappears automatically.

To make the window disappear promptly, after displaying the window, push this switch down to OFF.

This window allows you to confirm the assigned function of the ASSIGN 1/2 switches and the TURBO GAIN button, ON/OFF of the Picture Cache function, and ON/

Disabling display of the status confirmation windows

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

91

The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the SET STATUS page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

Item

STATUS

ABNORMAL

STATUS

FUNCTION

STATUS

AUDIO

Description

Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL window is displayed (ON or OFF).

Selects whether or not the FUNCTION window is displayed (ON or OFF).

Selects whether or not the STATUS

AUDIO window is displayed (ON or

OFF).

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to display the selected window, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

5

To continue setting other windows, repeat steps 3 and

4.

6

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

5-2-10 Confirming the Image of the

Return Video Signal in the

Viewfinder

The GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu allows you to set whether or not to see the image of the return video signal in the viewfinder. You can confirm only the image of HD-Y return video signal.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding down the MENU knob.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

MAINTENANCE, then push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the

MAINTENANCE menu appears.

If the menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

3

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the MENU knob once, then turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to GENLOCK, then push the MENU knob again to display the GENLOCK page.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the GENLOCK page appears, then push the

MENU knob to select the page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

4

Carry out setting operations as follows:

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

GENLOCK, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of GENLOCK changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the

GENLOCK setting changes to a ? mark.

2

Turn the MENU knob until OFF appears, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark, and the setting is executed.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

RETURN VIDEO, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark, and the setting is executed.

5

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

92

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen

Seeing the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder screen

Hold down the RET button on the lens. The image of the return video signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector is displayed on the viewfinder screen while you are holding down the RET button.

When the return video function is assigned to the ASSIGN

1 switch, you can see the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder screen while you are holding down the

ASSIGN 1 switch even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to “OFF” on the GENLOCK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

Note

When no signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector, the image is not changed even if you hold down the RET button on the lens.

However, the image is switched while you are holding down the ASSIGN 1 switch to which the return video function is assigned, even if no signal is input to the

GENLOCK IN connector.

5-3 Adjustments and

Settings from Menus

The camcorder provides menus for adjustments and settings.

5-3-1 Setting Gain Values for the

GAIN Selector Positions

Before using the camcorder, use the GAIN SW page of the

USER menu to set the gains corresponding to the L, M, and H positions of the GAIN selector, which switches the gain of the video amplifier.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the GAIN SW page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

Item

GAIN LOW

GAIN MID

GAIN HIGH

Description

Sets the gain value corresponding to the L position of the GAIN selector.

Sets the gain value corresponding to the M position of the GAIN selector.

Sets the gain value corresponding to the H position of the GAIN selector.

GAIN TURBO Sets the gain value corresponding to

TURBO GAIN button selection.

TURBO SW IND OFF: When you operate the GAIN selector after pressing the TURBO

GAIN button once, the video gain is changed according to the GAIN selector operation.

ON: When the video gain is boosted to gain value preset by pressing the

TURBO GAIN button once, the video gain is not changed even if you operated the GAIN selector, until you press the TURBO GAIN button once more.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

93

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of the selected item returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark on the left of the setting returns to a z mark.

Any of –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36 or 42 dB can be set for each of the L, M, and H positions, in any sequence.

To change the gain corresponding to another switch position, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

5-3-2 Selecting Output Signals

The OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu allows you select whether the HD-SDI OUT connectors output an

HD-SDI signal or not. When an optional HKDW-702/

HKDW-902R extension board is installed in the camcorder, you can select the type of video signals from the HD-SDI OUT connector (located on the side of the camcorder) and the TEST OUT connector, among from

SD VBS, or SD SDI.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the OUTPUT SEL page appears, and push the MENU knob.

The OUTPUT SEL page appears.

The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.

Item

HD SDI OUT

SD REAR BNC

OUT

1)

TEST OUT

SELECT

DOWN CON

MODE

1)

1)

Content

Sets whether or not the video signal is output from the HD-SDI OUT connector. When OFF is selected, the

HD-SDI circuit is disconnected, which saves power.

Selects the type of video signal to be output from the HD-SDI OUT connector (located on the side of the camcorder), OFF, VBS, or SDI

2)

.

Selects the type of video signal to be output from the TEST OUT connector. When HD is selected, an

HD-Y signal is output. When SD is selected, a down-converted color composite signal is output.

3)

Selects the conversion mode of the down converter from among SQEZE,

LETTR and CROP.

SQEZE: The picture is displayed without distortion on a monitor with a 16:9 aspect ratio. On a monitor with the 4:3 aspect ratio, the picture is distorted horizontally.

LETTR: Displays the picture without distortion on a monitor with the 4:3 aspect ratio, a video signal in the

16:9 aspect ratio is output by adding a blank area (no signal, black) top and bottom.

CROP

4)

: By cropping both the left and right sides of a video image with the 16:9 aspect ratio, a video signal with the 4:3 aspect ratio is output.

1) When an optional HKDW-702/HKDW-902R is not installed, these items are not displayed on the OUTPUT SEL page.

2) When SDI is selected, connect the HD-SDI OUT connector (located on the side of the camcorder) to the SDI IN connector of the monitor.

When VBS is selected, connect the HD-SDI OUT connector to the

VIDEO IN connector of the monitor.

3) When no picture is displayed on the monitor with the TEST OUT connector feeding the monitor, make sure the type of monitor (HD monitor / NTSC/PAL monitor) and the signal format of the output signal of the camcorder (1080i/525i) match.

4) The markers and zebra patterns are not displayed for an SD VBS signal output from the TEST OUT connector when CROP is selected.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, and push the MENU knob.

The b

at the left of the selected item changes to a z mark and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting, and push the MENU knob.

The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to a b

mark and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to a z mark.

To continue changing of another output signal setting, repeat steps 3 and 4.

94

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

5

To end menu operations, turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

5-3-3 Setting the Color Temperature

Manually

You can adjust the value of the white balance manually by setting the color temperature.

1

Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/

OFF switch to ON.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to PAINT, then push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the PAINT menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page appears.

If the menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

3

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the MENU knob once, and turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to WHITE. Then push the MENU knob to display the WHITE page.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the WHITE page appears, then push the MENU knob to select that page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

Item

COLOR

TEMP <A>

C TEMP BAL

<A>

Description

Sets the color temperature to the desired value. Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature.

Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.

R GAIN <A> Only the value of R GAIN is changed.

B GAIN <A> Only the value of B GAIN is changed.

5600K <A> Provides the same effect when the

5600K filter is used by setting to ON.

The above table shows the adjustment of the white balance of channel A.

Items followed by “<B>” are used to adjust the white balance of channel B.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

5

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

To continue setting other items, repeat steps 4 and 5.

6

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

5-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the

Auto White Balance Setting

By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance, you can make the picture warmer or colder.

The OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu allows you to make this setting.

1

Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/

OFF switch from OFF to ON.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

OPERATION, then push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

3

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the MENU knob once, and turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to OFFSET WHT. Then push the MENU knob to display the OFFSET WHT page.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the OFFSET WHT page appears, then push the

MENU knob to select that page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

95

Item

OFFSET

WHITE <A>

WARM-COOL

<A>

WARM-COOL

BAL <A>

OFFSET

WHITE <B>

WARM-COOL

<B>

WARM-COOL

BAL <B>

Description

Turns the setting of the offset for channel A ON or OFF. ON: Adds the offset adjusted on this page to the white balance.

When OFFSET WHITE <A> is ON, sets the offset for the white balance of channel A, using the color temperature. Adjust the value while looking at the real image because the error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature.

Adjusts the value more precisely if the adjustment by WARM-COOL <A> is not satisfactory.

Turns the setting of the offset for channel B ON or OFF. ON: Adds the offset adjusted on this page to the white balance.

Sets the offset for the white balance of channel B, using the color temperature. Adjust the value while looking at the real image because the error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature.

Adjusts the value more precisely if the adjustment by WARM-COOL <B> is not satisfactory.

4

Set the WHITE BAL switch to the position corresponding to the desired channel (A or B).

Note

If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B when you operate the camcorder, the adjustment value will not be reflected in the output signal.

5

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

6

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

To continue setting other items of the same white balance channel, repeat steps 5 and 6.

To set the other white balance channel, go back to step

4.

7

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Note

When using the OFFSET WHITE function, “+” is displayed as the WARM color temperature indication and

“-” is displayed as the COOL temperature indication in the viewfinder.

5-3-5 Assigning Functions to

Assignable Switches

You can assign the desired function to the ASSIGN 1/2 switches and the TURBO GAIN button.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item.

Item Description

ASSIGN SW <1> Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1

(push-type) switch.

ASSIGN SW <2> Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2

(slide-type) switch.

TURBO SW Assigns the function to the TURBO

GAIN button.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item corresponding to the switch to which you want to assign the function, then push the MENU knob.

The corresponding ASSIGN SW window appears.

96

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

ASSIGN SW <1> window

ASSIGN SW <2> window

TURBO SW window

Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 (push-type) switch and the TURBO GAIN button

Function

OFF

F. MIC

MONO/

STEREO

PICTURE

CACHE

ON/OFF

1)

TEST OUT

CHARACTER

Description

Disables the switch.

Assigns the monaural/stereo switch function when a stereo microphone is connected to the MIC IN connector.

Assigns the Picture Cache mode ON/

OFF function.

MARKER

RE-TAKE

ATW

RETURN

VIDEO

Assigns the function for switching whether or not text is superimposed on the video signal to be output from the

TEST OUT connector.

Assigns the ON/OFF function for displaying all markers.

Assign the RE-TAKE function that allows the camcorder to search for the cut most recently recorded and records the new cut over it.

Assigns the ON/OFF function of autotracing white balance.

Assigns the ON/OFF function for displaying the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder.

2)

LENS RET Assigns the same function as that of the RET button on the lens.

REC SWITCH Assigns the VTR S/S (start/stop) function.

Function

TURBO

SWITCH

TELE-FILE

MARK

ZEBRA

5600K

FREEZE

MANUAL

TRIG

3)

UA01 to

UA10

4)

Description

Assigns the TURBO GAIN function.

Assigns the function to the Tele-File mark recording button.

Assigns the zebra pattern display function.

Applies an electrical 5600K filter.

Assigns the function for storing the picture from the camera as a freezeframe picture manually.

Assigns the items assigned on the

ASSIGN EDIT page.

5)

1) The assigned function is effective only when an optional HKDW-703 is installed.

2) Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to “OFF” on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can use this switch to display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder.

3) The assigned function is effective only when an optional HKDW-

905R is installed.

4) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the ASSIGN EDIT menu.

5) To assign the items to the ASSIGN EDIT menu, use the USER

MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.

Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2 (slide-type) switch

Function

OFF

F. MIC

MONO/

STEREO

Content

Disables the switch.

Assigns the monaural/stereo switch function when a stereo microphone is connected to the MIC IN connector.

Assigns the Picture Cache mode ON/

OFF function.

PICTURE

CACHE

ON/OFF

1)

TEST OUT

CHARACTER

MARKER

Assigns the function for switching whether or not the characters are mixed with the video signal to be output from the TEST OUT connector.

Assigns the ON/OFF function for displaying all markers.

ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display function.

CAM FREEZE

SEL

2)

Assigns the function for selecting the freeze-frame picture to be displayed on the viewfinder (picture from the camera or the freeze-frame picture stored to memory).

UA01 to

UA10

3)

Assigns the items assigned in the

ASSIGN EDIT page.

1) The assigned function is effective only when an optional HKDW-703 is installed.

2) The assigned function is effective only when an optional HKDW-

905R is installed.

3) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the ASSIGN EDIT page.

Note

For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2

(slide-type) switch, you cannot change those settings

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

97

using other menus. The function assigned to the

ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the menu setting.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to assign to the assignable switch, then push the MENU knob.

The setting is executed and the FUNCTION 1 page appears again.

To continue to assign a function to another assignable switch

Repeat steps 3 and 4.

5

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

To return to the FUNCTION 1 page

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to ESC at the top right of the window, then push the MENU knob.

Operation of the assignable switches when UA01 to UA10 are assigned

The following shows an example of how to use the assignable switch to which the function registered in UA01 to UA10 on the ASSIGN EDIT page has been assigned.

In the following example, the FAN ON/OFF function on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is assigned.

1

Push the corresponding assignable switch.

The item and the current setting are displayed on the viewfinder screen.

2

Push the MENU knob while the item and the current setting are displayed.

“:” appears at the left of the item.

3

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting while “:” is displayed.

Viewfinder screen display

When the function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch

(push-type), the display disappears from the viewfinder screen 3 seconds after you perform the last operation.

When the function is assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch

(slide-type), the display remains while the ASSIGN 2 switch is set to the ON position (slide it in the direction of the arrow). To make the display disappear, set the switch to

OFF.

5-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the

Internal Clock

You can set or change the date and time of the internal clock. The date and time set are reflected in the time code.

1

Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/

OFF switch to ON.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

“DIAGNOSIS,” then push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the DIAGNOSIS menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

3

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to TIME/DATE, then push the MENU knob to display the TIME/DATE page.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the TIME/DATE page appears, then push the

MENU knob to select that page.

The b

mark moves to “ADJUST.”

TIME/DATE page

98

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

4

Push the MENU knob.

The TIME ADJUST setting window appears.

Item

HOUR

MIN

SEC

YEAR

MONTH

DAY

Description

Sets the hour value.

Sets the minutes value.

Sets the seconds value.

Sets the year.

Sets the month.

Sets the day.

5

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

6

Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

7

To continue the remaining settings, repeat steps 5 and

6.

8

When you finish making settings, turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to OK, then push the MENU knob.

The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 5 to 7. The TIME/DATE page of the

DIAGNOSIS menu appears again. The time set on the

TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed.

To cancel the setting

Before executing step 8, move the b

mark to ESC at the top right of the window then push the MENU knob.

Alternatively, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side.

All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears.

5-3-7 Selecting a Lens File

The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to change the lens file according to the lens in use.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the LENS FILE page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

The LENS FILE page shows the file name of the lens file currently selected.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to LENS

FILE SELECT, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob until the lens file No. in use appears, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

5

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

99

5-3-8 Using UMID Data

To perform operations from interviewing to editing effectively and to detect audio-visual materials easily when reusing them, metadata that provides additional information is recorded along with audio-visual data on a tape. As one of application of metadata, the UMID

(Unique Material Identifier) is internationally standardized.

What is a UMID?

The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a unique identifier for audio-visual material defined by the

SMPTE330M-2003 standard.

The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID, which includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes.

For details, refer to SMPTE-330M.

Extended UMID (64 bytes)

Basic UMID (32 bytes) Source Pack (32 bytes)

Universal label L Inst. No.

Material Number Time/Date

Spatial

Co-ordinates

Country Org User

12 bytes 1 3 bytes 16 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes

A globally unique ID is automatically recorded at every shooting.

The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional information, such as location, time/date, company, and so on.

The UMID is applied as follows:

Instance No.

Material No.

ID generated when shooting

Same as the above

Source Pack

Shooting information (when, where and who)

Same as the above

Original material: 00 00 00

Copied material: generation number (1 byte) + random number (2 bytes)

M

Distinguishing between original material and copied material

Using the Extended UMID

M

Material source ID/detecting material

You have to enter a country code, organization code, and user code. Set the country code referring to the ISO-3166 table, and set the organization code and user code independently.

For details, see “UMID menu setup” on page 101.

M

Metadata pack that identifies the source of material by defining the when, where, and who of the material unit with which it is associated.

Functions of UMID data

The UMID data enables the following:

• Addition of a globally unique ID to every shot of audiovisual material. The unique ID is used to detect the material source and to link it with the original source material.

• Distinguishing between original material and copied material. 00 is added to the Instance Number for original material.

100

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

• Recording based on the UTC. The UTC is used when recording the UMID. This enables uniform control of source material recorded all over the world based on the universal time code.

• Calculating the date difference among source materials.

The source material is recorded based on the MJD

(Modified Julian Date), which enables easy calculation of date difference among source materials.

UMID menu setup

The UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu allows you to make settings for UMID data.

1

Holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/

OFF switch from OFF to ON.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

“OPERATION,” then push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page appears.

If the menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

3

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to UMID SET, then push the

MENU knob.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the UMID SET page appears, then push the

MENU knob.

The current setting appears on the right side of each item.

UMID SET page

Item Contents

EX-OWNERSHIP

REC

Specifies whether to record the user data.

COUNTRY CODE Sets the country code.

ORGANIZATION Sets the organization code.

USER CODE Sets the user code.

INSTANCE NO

TIME ZONE

MACHINE

Specifies how to generate the instance number.

Sets the time difference from UTC.

Displays the machine-specific number.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the item you want to set, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark to the left of the selected item changes to a z mark, and the z mark to the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

5

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting of the selected item or to display the desired value, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

6

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Additional information on the UMID SET menu items

EX-OWNERSHIP REC

Specify whether to record the user data.

ON: The user data (COUNTRY CODE,

ORGANIZATION, and USER CODE) are recorded on the tape.

OFF: The user data are not recorded.

COUNTRY CODE

When you select COUNTRY CODE, the character table appears.

Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte alphanumeric strings) according to the values defined in

ISO 3166-1.

There are about 240 country codes.

Find your own country code on the following home page.

Refer to ISO-3166-1: http://www.din.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1/ en_listp1.html

For detailed information on how to enter characters,

follow steps 3 to 6 in “5-2-8 Setting the Shot ID” on page

89.

When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the active part of the code will occupy the first part of the 4-bytes and the remainder must be filled with the space character (20h).

Example: In the case of Japan

For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes, if JPN, it is 3 bytes.

As a result, enter the following:

JP_ _ or

JPN _ where _ represents a space.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

101

ORGANIZATION (organization code)

When you select this item, the character table appears.

Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string for the organization code.

Note

There are no problems in recording or playing back audiovideo signals, if ORGANIZATION is not set.

Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the

SMPTE registration office. If no organization code has been acquired, it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary string. In this case, a rule, the code “00” must be entered. Freelance operators who do not belong to an organization should enter “~.”

USER CODE

When you select this item, the USER CODE window appears.

Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user identification.

The user code is registered with each organization locally.

It is usually not centrally registered.

When the user code is less than 4 bytes, enter the user code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space character (20h) in the remaining strings.

This user code is determined by the organization. The methods used depend on the organization.

Note

User bits cannot be entered when no organization code has been entered.

INSTANCE NO.

Select the method for generating the numbers to be used to identify original video images.

RND: Random

GEN: Generation (number of times of copy)

Ask the system administrator for advice.

TIME ZONE

When you select this item, the TIME ZONE window appears.

The UTC is calculated based on the local time, using the time zone. If the time zone is not set properly, the UTC will not be recorded correctly.

Note

When you change the time zone, adjust the built-in clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and then on again.

MACHINE

An identification number specific to the machine is displayed. This number cannot be set or modified by users.

5-3-9 Using the Hyper Gamma

The Hyper Gamma is a new set of transfer functions designed to be easy to use as previous gamma curve functions and to realize a natural tone in high contrast scenes by taking full advantage of the capacity and wide dynamic range of the Power Had CCD sensor.

1

Follow steps 1, 2, and 3 in “5-3-3 Setting the Color

Temperature Manually” on page 95 to display the

GAMMA page of the PAINT menu, and then push the

MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

GAMMA SELECT, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of GAMMA SELECT changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3

Turn the MENU knob until HG appears, then push the

MENU knob.

As you turn the MENU knob, the type of gamma table changes in the following sequence: STD y HG y

USER.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to GAM

SEL (HG), then push the MENU knob.

5

Turn the MENU knob to select the hyper gamma table most suitable to the shooting conditions and purpose.

Set the time difference from UTC. When setting summer time or daylight savings time, change the code to one which will advance the time by 1 hour.

102

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

White clip level: 100%

Effective for shooting in low light scenes for better tonal reproductions of lowkey areas

(-3 dB Gain can be used for further noise reduction.)

Hyper

Gamma 1

Effective for shooting from low light to high contrast scenes

(-3 dB Gain should not be used.)

Hyper

Gamma 2

White clip level: 109%

Hyper

Gamma 3

Hyper

Gamma 4

109%

100%

Hyper Gamma 3

Hyper Gamma 4

Hyper Gamma 1

Hyper Gamma 2

8

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch.

When you select STD in step 3

The following gamma tables are available.

2

3

Setting Gamma curve

1 Equivalent to SD ENG camcorder

4

Equivalent to SMPT-240M

Equivalent to ITU-709

Equivalent to GAIN50.

6

Push the MENU knob.

7

Change the white clip level to fit the hyper gamma selected in step 5.

1

Display the KNEE 1 page of the PAINT menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

WHITE CLIP LEVEL, then push the MENU knob.

3

Turn the MENU knob until the corresponding white clip level appears, then push the MENU knob.

Note

You cannot change the settings related to KNEE functions when you use the hyper gamma function.

5-3-10 Using the USER Gamma

You can create the desired gamma table using a personal computer on which software CvpFileEditor™

1)

has been installed and load this table into your camcorder via a

“Memory Stick.”

When a user gamma table is selected, either gamma

(LEVEL or ON/OFF) or knee (POINT, SLOPE, ON/OFF or DCC) or both may become disabled. This is because the gamma and knee are compulsorily fixed when creating the gamma curve.

1) CvpFileEditor is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

1

Follow steps 1, 2, and 3 in “5-3-3 Setting the Color

Temperature Manually” on page 95 to display the

GAMMA page of the PAINT menu, and then push the

MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

GAMMA SELECT, then push the MENU knob.

The mark on the left of GAMMA SELECT changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3

Turn the MENU knob until USER appears, then push the MENU knob.

As you turn the MENU knob, the type of the gamma table changes in the following sequence: STD y HG y USER.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to GAM

SEL (USER), then push the MENU knob.

5

Select the desired USER GAMMA table.

You must load gamma table data from a “Memory

Stick” beforehand.

If gamma table data is not loaded into the camcorder, data from STANDARD is substituted.

For detailed information on how to create and load data, refer to the Maintenance Manual.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

103

6

Push the MENU knob.

7

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

CvpFileEditor

The HDW-F900R supports CvpFileEditor Version 2.1 or later.

If the version of your CvpFileEditor is an earlier version, you can download the software from the “eCSite,” the site for downloading business and professional software from

Sony Corporation.

If you have not registered on in “eCSite”, access the following URL and register.

https://www.ecspert.sony.biz/ecsite/center/ registUserInfo?action=regulationsDirect

For detailed information on how to install the software, refer to the manual for CvpFileEditor available on the site.

5-3-11 Using the Freeze Mix

Function

When the HKDW-905R Slow Shutter and Image Inverter

Board (not supplied) is installed, you can store the video from the camera as a freeze-frame picture to the memory on the board, and align the camera by mixing the stored freeze-frame picture with the video from the camera.

Settings to store the video from the camera as a freeze-frame picture

1

Holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/

OFF switch from OFF to ON.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

OPERATION, then push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page appears.

If the menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

3

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to FREEZE MIX, then push the MENU knob.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the FREEZE MIX page appears, then push the

MENU knob.

The current setting appears on the right side of each item.

Item

FREEZE

FREEZE AUTO

TRIG

FREEZE MAN

TRIG

FREEZE STOP

TIME

CAM/FREEZE

SEL

FREEZE/MIX

SEL

FREEZE

STATUS

Contents

Specifies whether to store the video from the camera as a freeze-frame picture (ON) or not (OFF).

Specifies the method to store the freeze-frame picture automatically.

When FREEZE AUTO TRIG is set to

OFF, stores the freeze-frame picture manually.

Sets the duration of display of the freeze-frame picture when it is stored to memory.

Specifies whether to display the video from the camera (CAM) or the freeze-frame picture stored to the memory (FREZ) on the viewfinder.

When CAM/FREEZE SEL is set to

FREZ, specifies whether to display only the freeze-frame picture stored to the memory on the board (FREZ) or mix the freeze-frame picture with the video from the camera (MIX) on the viewfinder.

Displays whether a freeze-frame picture is stored to the memory on the board (STORE) or not (CLEAR).

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to

FREEZE, then push the MENU knob.

The b mark on the left of FREEZE changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

5

Turn the MENU knob to set FREEZE to ON, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

Note

When FREEZE is set to OFF, the freeze-frame picture stored to memory is erased.

6

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to FREEZE

AUTO TRIG, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of FREEZE AUTO TRIG changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

104

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

7

Turn the MENU knob to set the method to store the freeze-frame picture automatically.

As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in the following sequence: OFF y REC.S y REC.P.

To store the freeze-frame picture automatically

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to REC.S or REC.P, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

When REC.S is selected, the picture at the beginning of recording is stored; when REC.P is selected, the picture at the end of recording is stored. In both cases, the picture is displayed on the viewfinder for the duration specified by FREEZE STOP TIME, then the picture is automatically stored to memory.

When the picture is stored, FREEZE STATUS indication changes from CLEAR to STORE.

To store the freeze-frame picture manually

Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to OFF, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

For details on procedure to store the picture manually,

see “Storing the freeze-frame picture manually” on page 105.

8

If necessary, set the duration of display of the freezeframe picture on the viewfinder when it is stored to memory.

1

Follow steps 1, 2, and 3 in “Settings to store the

video from the camera as a freeze-frame picture”

on page 104 to display the FREEZE MIX page of

the OPERATION menu, and then push the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

FREEZE STOP, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of FREEZE STOP changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3

Turn the MENU knob to set the duration, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

Storing the freeze-frame picture manually

1

Follow steps 1, 2, and 3 in “Settings to store the video

from the camera as a freeze-frame picture” on page

104 to display the FREEZE MIX page of the

OPERATION menu, and then push the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to FREEZE

MAN TRIG, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of FREEZE MAN TRIG changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to EXEC, then push the MENU knob.

The message “PICTURE FREZE OK? YES b

NO” appears.

At this time, the b

mark is on the left of flashing NO.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to YES

(YES flashes at this time), then push the MENU knob.

The picture from the camera at the moment when the

MENU knob is pressed is stored to memory as a freeze-frame picture.

The freeze-frame picture is displayed on the viewfinder for the duration specified by FREEZE

STOP TIME, then the video from the camera resumes.

After the freeze-frame picture is stored, the FREEZE

STATUS indication changes from CLEAR to STORE.

Note

When FREEZE is not set to ON, the freeze-frame picture will not be saved even if you press the MENU knob in step 4. The message “FREEZE MODE IS

OFF!” appears at this time.

Viewing the stored picture

1

Follow steps 1, 2, and 3 in “Settings to store the video

from the camera as a freeze-frame picture” on page

104 to display the FREEZE MIX page of the

OPERATION menu, and then push the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to CAM/

FREEZE SEL, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of CAM/FREEZE SEL changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

3

Turn the MENU knob to set CAM/FREEZE SEL to

FREZE, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

FREEZE/MIX SEL, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of FREEZE/MIX SEL changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

105

5

Turn the MENU knob to set FREEZE/MIX SEL to

FREEZE, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

The freeze-frame picture stored to memory appears on the viewfinder.

Mixing the picture stored to memory with the video from the camera

1

Store the freeze-frame picture to memory.

2

2 Follow steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 in “Viewing the stored

picture” on page 105.

3

Turn the MENU knob to set FREEZE/MIX SEL to

MIX, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

The freeze-frame picture stored to memory and the video from the camera are mixed and displayed on the viewfinder.

Distinguishing the freeze-frame picture from the mixed picture

When CAM/FREEZE SEL is set to FREZE, the picture on the viewfinder can be identified by the status indication

(FREZ or MIX).

1

Follow steps 1 and 2 in “Settings to store the video

from the camera as a freeze-frame picture” on page

104.

2

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, push and turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to VF DISP 2, then push the MENU knob.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the VF DISP 2 page appears, then push the

MENU knob.

The current settings appear on the right side of each item.

The b

mark on the left of DISP FREEZE changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to set DISP FREEZE to ON, then push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

methods used depend on the organization.

Notes

• When this unit is turned off, the freeze-frame picture stored to memory is erased.

• The freeze-frame picture stored to memory cannot be copied to the “Memory Stick”.

• The display of the freeze-frame picture is cancelled automatically right before the recording starts, and the video being recorded is displayed on the viewfinder.

• When SLOW SHUTTER is set to ON on the HKDW-

905R Slow Shutter and Image Inverter Board (not supplied), the freeze-frame picture cannot be displayed.

Also, while the freeze-frame picture is displayed on the viewfinder, the SLOW SHUTTER setting cannot be set to ON.

• When IMAGE INVERT is set to ON, the freeze-frame picture cannot be displayed. Also, while the freezeframe picture is displayed on the viewfinder, the IMAGE

INVERT setting cannot be set to ON.

• When Interval Rec function is activated, the freezeframe picture cannot be displayed.

• While the freeze-frame picture is displayed, automatic adjustment of black balance and white balance cannot be carried out.

• While the freeze-frame picture is displayed, settings on certain functions cannot be verified. This is due to limitations of the Freeze Mix function and because of the limitations, functions which utilize analog circuits cannot be reflected to the freeze-frame picture display.

For example, the results of gain value setting and the

WHITE BAL switch settings cannot be verified on the freeze-frame picture.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to DISP

FREEZE, then push the MENU knob.

106

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

5-4 Resetting USER

Menu Settings to the

Standard Settings

You can return all settings in the USER menu to the standard settings.

1

Holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/

OFF switch from OFF to ON.

The TOP menu appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to FILE, then push the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page appears.

If the menu has been used before, the page accessed last appears.

3

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to USER FILE, then push the MENU knob.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears, then push the

MENU knob.

The current settings appear on the right side of each item.

6

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to USER

PRESET, then push the MENU knob.

The message “PRESET OK? YES b

NO” appears.

5

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to YES, then push the MENU knob.

The settings for all items in the USER menu are reset to the standard settings.

Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings

107

Saving and Loading User

Setting Data

Chapter

6

6-1 Saving and Loading

User Files

The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory Stick” drive, which enables you to save user files, scene files, lens files, reference files and ALL files. You can load these files from the “Memory Stick” for immediate recall of a particular setting configuration.

When a menu page is displayed, you can set up the camcorder so that inserting a “Memory Stick” automatically jumps to the appropriate file-related menu page.

For details about scene files, see “6-2 Saving and Loading

Scene Files” on page 112.

For details of the function for jumping to the appropriate

file-related menu page, see “6-3 Jumping to a File-Related

Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”” on page

116.

“Memory Sticks” usable with this camcorder

With this camcorder, you can use “Memory Sticks” whose capacity does not exceed 128 MB.

For details, see “Memory Stick” in “Specifications” on

page 143.

6-1-1 Handling the “Memory Stick”

The “Memory Stick” can be inserted to or removed from the camcorder with the power turned on or off.

Inserting the “Memory Stick”

1

Push the MEMORY STICK OPEN button.

The cover of the “Memory Stick” compartment opens.

MEMORY STICK OPEN button

2

Hold the “Memory Stick” with the notch facing downward and the label side facing toward you, and insert the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” insertion slot until it clicks into place. Then close the cover.

Label side of “Memory Stick”

Note

If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may be turned around or upside down. Do not force the “Memory

Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of the notch and arrow on the “Memory Stick” before inserting the

“Memory Stick,” and then try inserting it again.

Removing the “Memory Stick”

Press the MEMORY STICK OPEN button to open the cover of the “Memory Stick” compartment.

Push the eject button after confirming that the ACCESS indicator is not lit. The “Memory Stick” pops out.

108

Saving and Loading User Files

Check that the ACCESS indicator is not lit.

MEMORY STICK OPEN button

• Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in a location subject to:

—extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a car or the outdoors exposed to a burning sun, or a place near a heater

—direct sunlight

—high humidity

—excessive dust

• When storing and carrying the “Memory Stick,” keep it in its original case to ensure protection of important data.

• When carrying the camcorder with the “Memory Stick” inserted, close the cover of the menu operating section.

• Avoid removing the “Memory Stick” from the insertion slot while the access indicator is lit.

• Do not format the “Memory Stick” using a PC.

• Formatting of the “Memory Stick” can be performed on

the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu (page

168).

Eject button

Note

Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while the ACCESS indicator is lit. You may lose data or damage the “Memory

Stick.”

Protecting saved data

To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data, use the LOCK switch on the “Memory Stick.”

Slide the switch right to the write protect position. The message “MEMORY STICK LOCKED” is displayed.

This ensures that you cannot inadvertently overwrite data on the “Memory Stick.”

6-1-2 Saving USER Menu Data (User

File) to the “Memory Stick”

You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder as user files in the “Memory Stick.”

You can save up to 100 user files in the “Memory Stick.”

Insert the “Memory Stick,” then proceed as follows:

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

The last accessed menu page appears on the viewfinder screen.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

Notes on using and storing the “Memory

Stick”

• Avoid touching the connector of the “Memory Stick” or contacting it with a metal object.

• When attaching a label to the “Memory Stick,” use only the label supplied for the “Memory Stick.”

• Do not drop, bend, or submit the “Memory Stick” to external shock.

• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick.”

• Avoid getting liquids on the “Memory Stick.”

If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved

Set the file ID before going to step 3.

For details on setting the file ID, see “Setting the file

ID” on page 110.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to USER

FILE SAVE, then push the MENU knob.

The USER SAVE page appears.

Saving and Loading User Files

109

When a ? appears on the left of “P00” at the top left of the page, you can change the page. Up to 20 pages, from P00 to P19, can be used to save user files in the

“Memory Stick.” Each page can hold up to 5 files.

4

Turn the MENU knob until the page that contains the desired file number appears, then push the MENU knob.

5

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired file number, then push the MENU knob.

When a file number is shown as “NEW FILE,” this means that the file is empty. When data is stored in a file number, the file name appears.

The ACCESS indicator lights.

When the saving is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears and the ACCESS indicator goes off.

If you select a file number where data has already been saved

The message “OVER WRITE OK? YES b

NO” appears. In this case, the b

mark appears on the left of

“NO,” which is flashing.

• To stop overwriting, push the MENU knob.

• To overwrite, move the b

mark to YES, then push the MENU knob.

You can select the information displayed on each

USER SAVE or USER LOAD page by changing the

DISPLAY MODE setting.

For details, see “Selecting the display contents” on page 111.

6

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen.

USER menu settings to be saved in the “Memory

Stick”

Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are saved in the “Memory Stick” as a user file. However, you can select saved data that are not to be loaded from the

“Memory Stick” by using the items LOAD CUSTOM

DATA, LOAD OUT OF USER, BEFORE FILE PAGE and

USER LOAD WHITE on the USER FILE2 page of the

FILE menu.

If data cannot be saved

If one of the following error messages appears during or after the save operation, then the data was not saved.

Data save error messages

Error message Cause

MEMORY STICK

ERROR

(flashing)

Circuit or

“Memory Stick” fault.

Action

NO MEMORY

STICK (flashing)

No “Memory

Stick” is inserted.

Insert or reinsert the

“Memory Stick.”

MEMORY STICK

LOCKED

The LOCK switch on the

“Memory Stick” is set to the write protect position.

Set the LOCK switch to the write enable position.

Check the circuitry, or replace the “Memory

Stick”.

Setting the file ID

Before data is saved to a “Memory Stick,” it is useful to set a file ID for the “Memory Stick” to identify it.

When data is saved to a “Memory Stick,” the file ID is saved to the “Memory Stick” together with the data.

Note

Set the file ID before saving data in the “Memory Stick.”

Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.

1

On the USER FILE page, turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to F. ID.

2

Push the MENU knob.

110

Saving and Loading User Files

A character table appears, allowing you to select characters you want to enter.

3

Follow the procedure of steps 4 and 5 described in “5-

2-8 Setting the Shot ID” (page 89) to enter the file ID.

4

When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU knob to move the v

mark to END, then push the

MENU knob.

The entered file ID is now displayed.

6-1-3 Loading Saved Data from a

“Memory Stick”

Note

The data loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrites the data saved in the camcorder.

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to USER

FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page.

File ID set in step 3

After setting the file ID, follow the procedure from

step 3 in “6-1-2 Saving USER Menu Data (User File)

to the “Memory Stick”” (page 109).

The set file ID is saved in the “Memory Stick” with the data.

Selecting the display contents

You can select the contents of the file to be displayed on the USER SAVE page and USER LOAD page (P01 to

P19).

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

DISPLAY MODE, then push the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark until the desired type of the display contents (see the following table) appears, then push the MENU knob.

2

Push the MENU knob.

The USER LOAD page appears.

3

Turn the MENU knob until the page that contains the desired file number appears, then push the MENU knob.

4

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired file number to be loaded, then push the MENU knob.

Display type Description

ALL

F.ID

File ID (10 characters) and date (month/ day/year)

File ID (16 characters)

DATE

MODEL

Saved date (year/month/day/hours/ minutes/seconds)

Information on the model

The ACCESS indicator lights.

Saving and Loading User Files

111

When the load is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears and the ACCESS indicator goes off.

The USER FILE page appears again.

5

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

If data cannot be loaded

If one of the following error messages appears during or after the load operation, then the data was not loaded.

Data load error messages

Error message

NO MEMORY

STICK (flashing)

MEMORY STICK

ERROR

(flashing)

OTHER

MODEL’S FILE

(flashing)

Cause

No “Memory

Stick” is inserted.

Circuit or

“Memory Stick” fault.

Action

Insert or reinsert the

“Memory Stick.”

Recheck, and consult your Sony representative.

The “Memory

Stick” contains data that cannot be loaded into this camcorder.

Do not try to load data saved from another camcorder.

6-2 Saving and Loading

Scene Files

You can save various settings for shooting a particular scene as a scene file. Loading the scene file, you can quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene.

You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files in a “Memory Stick.”

You can also load data from the “Memory Stick” into the camcorder memory.

Data that can be saved in a scene file

You can save the following data in a scene file:

• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu (except the items that return to the default values when power is on, such as OUTPUT SELECT)

• Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and

ECS mode

The white balance data can be loaded only when the

SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu is ON.

6-2-1 Saving a Scene File

To save a scene file in the “Memory Stick,” insert the

“Memory Stick” before starting the operation.

1

In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

Alternatively, select SCENE FILE on the CONTENTS page to display the SCENE FILE page.

SCENE FILE page

If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved

Set the file ID before going to step 3.

For details on setting the file ID, see “Setting the file

ID” on page 114.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to SCENE

STORE, then push the MENU knob.

112

Saving and Loading Scene Files

The SCENE STORE page appears.

4

Select the desired file number.

When no “Memory Stick” has been inserted

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired file number, then push the MENU knob.

When the save is completed, the SCENE FILE page appears again.

When you select a file number where data has already been saved

The message “OVER WRITE OK? YES b

NO” appears. In this case, the b

mark is placed on the left of “NO.”

• To stop overwriting, push the MENU knob.

• To overwrite, move the b

mark to “YES,” then push the MENU knob.

When a “Memory Stick” has been inserted

You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20, to save scene files in the “Memory Stick.” Each page can hold up to 5 files.

1

Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears, then push the MENU knob.

You can select the contents of the user file to be displayed on the page.

For details, see “Selecting the display contents” on page 114.

5

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

To return to the SCENE FILE page

After the message “COMPLETE” is displayed, move the b

mark to ESC at the top right of the page by turning the MENU knob, then push the MENU knob.

White balance setting data to be saved in the scene file

The white balance setting data selected when you save the scene file is saved. For example, when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A, the adjusted values in memory A are saved in the scene file, and when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the preset value is saved.

Saving scene files from the camcorder memory to the “Memory Stick”

You can save five scene files from the camcorder to the

“Memory Stick” in a single operation.

1

After displaying the SCENE FILE page turn the

MENU knob to move the b

mark to SCENE STORE, then push the MENU knob.

One of the SCENE STORE pages appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the desired SCENE

STORE page appears, then push the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired file number, then push the MENU knob.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to 5FILE

SAVE

B

MEM1-5, then push the MENU knob.

Saving and Loading Scene Files

113

4

When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU knob to move the v

mark to END, then push the

MENU knob.

The SCENE FILE page appears again.

When the save is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears.

4

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Note

If files have been saved in the page selected in step 2, those files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder memory. For example, files from 001 to 005 are replaced.

Setting the file ID

Before the data is saved as a scene file, it is useful to set a file ID to identify it. The set file ID is saved together with the data.

1

On the SCENE FILE page, turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to F. ID.

2

Push the MENU knob.

A character table appears, allowing you to select characters you want to enter.

Follow the procedure from step 3 in “6-2-1 Saving a

Scene File” (page 112).

The set file ID is saved together with the data.

Selecting the display contents

You can select the items of file information to be displayed on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to P20) or the SCENE

RECALL pages (P01 to P20) used for saving data to or loading data from a “Memory Stick.”

For details, see “Selecting the display contents” on page

111.

6-2-2 Loading a Scene File

1

In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page.

Alternatively, on the CONTENTS page select SCENE

FILE, then push the MENU knob to display the

SCENE FILE page.

3

Load a scene file.

To load a scene file stored in the camcorder

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired file number, then push the MENU knob.

The s which is displayed on the left of the file number changes to x.

The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file.

3

Follow steps 4 and 5 in “5-2-8 Setting the Shot ID”

(page 89) to enter the file ID.

Note

Set the file ID before saving the scene file in the

“Memory Stick” or the camcorder memory.

Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.

114

Saving and Loading Scene Files

To cancel the selected scene file

Move the b

mark to x, then push the MENU knob. x changes to s.

The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting this scene file.

To load a scene file saved in the “Memory Stick”

1

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

SCENE RECALL, then push the MENU knob.

The SCENE RECALL page appears.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to 5FILE

LOAD b

MEM 1-5, then push the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the page that contains the desired file number appears, then push the

MENU knob.

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the desired file number, then push the MENU knob.

When loading is complete, the message

“COMPLETE” appears and the ACCESS indicator goes off.

4

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Notes

• The scene files loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.

• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory when the “Memory Stick” is inserted, return to the

SCENE RECALL display and load the desired scene file in the camcorder memory.

• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO

FILE”), an existing file of the same number is unaffected. In the example shown in step 3, MEM(3) is not overwritten.

When loading is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears.

If no file is present with a particular file number, this is shown as “NO FILE.”

4

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

Loading scene files from a “Memory Stick” into the camcorder memory

You can load up to five scene files stored in the “Memory

Stick” into the camcorder memory in a single operation.

1

After displaying the SCENE FILE page, turn the

MENU knob to move the b

mark to SCENE

RECALL, then push the MENU knob.

A SCENE RECALL screen appears.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the page that contains the desired scene files appears, then push the MENU knob.

6-2-3 Resetting the Camcorder

Settings to the Standard Settings

Saved in the Reference File

You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the settings saved in the reference file (standard settings).

For details about the items in the reference file, refer to the

Maintenance Manual.

1

After displaying the SCENE FILE page, turn the

MENU knob to move the b

mark to STANDARD, then push the MENU knob.

The s displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to x. The settings of the camcorder are reset to the settings saved in the reference file.

Saving and Loading Scene Files

115

To cancel resetting

Push the MENU knob again while x is displayed. The operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD was selected.

6-3 Jumping to a File-

Related Menu Page When

Inserting a “Memory

Stick”

A “Memory Stick” enables you to save user files, scene files, lens files, reference files and “ALL” files. The camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so that when a “Memory Stick” holding these files is inserted while in menu operating mode, a menu page relating to the desired file is automatically displayed on the screen. This enables you to proceed to file operations quickly. This is very convenient especially when you manage data files using “Memory Sticks.”

The page to be displayed can be selected on the MEMORY

STICK page of the FILE menu.

1

In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.

2

Turn the MENU knob until the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu appears, then push the MENU knob to select the page. Alternatively, on the

CONTENTS page select MEMORY STICK.

116

Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”

3

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to M.S. IN

> JUMP TO, then push the MENU knob.

The b

mark on the left of M.S. IN > JUMP TO changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting changes to a ? mark.

4

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting

(target FILE menu page).

Setting

OFF

USER

ALL

SCENE

LENS

REFER

USER1

Description

Disables this function.

Jumps to the USER FILE page.

Jumps to the ALL FILE page.

Jumps to the SCENE FILE page.

Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page.

Jumps to the REFERENCE page.

Jumps to the USER 1 page.

5

Push the MENU knob.

The z mark returns to a b

mark, and the ? mark returns to a z mark.

Notes

In the following cases, jumping to the target page is impossible.

• When the power is turned on after you insert a “Memory

Stick.”

• When OFF is selected for the M.S. IN > JUMP TO item.

• When any of the following menu pages is already displayed.

— A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of the FILE menu

— MEMORY STICK, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE, LENS

FILE, REFERENCE FILE or ROM VERSION page

Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”

117

Setting Up the

Camcorder

Chapter

7

2

Slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow points at the matching line on the camcorder.

7-1 Power Supply

The following power supplies can be used with the camcorder.

• BP-GL65/GL95/L60S Lithium-ion battery pack

• AC power using the AC-DN10 AC adaptor

“LOCK” arrow

7-1-1 Using a Battery Pack

When a BP-GL95 battery pack is used, the camcorder will operate continuously for about 110 minutes. When a BP-

GL65 is used, the camcorder will operate continuously for about 80 minutes.

Before use, charge the battery pack with a BC-L70/M150

Battery Charger. It takes about 145 minutes to charge one

BP-GL95.

For details, refer to the battery charger operation manual.

Note on using the battery pack

A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged.

Attaching the battery pack

1

Press the battery pack against the back of the camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the matching line on the camcorder.

Detaching the battery pack

Back of camcorder

Battery pack

Align these lines.

Matching line on the camcorder

Holding the button in, pull the battery pack up.

7-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation

Due to an Exhausted Battery

If you use both an internal battery pack (attached to the camcorder) and an external battery (connected to the DC

IN connector) at the same time, you can avoid breaks in operation due to dead batteries.

When the external battery begins to fail and an internal battery pack is also used

Remove the DC output cable from the DC IN connector.

The power source will switch to the internal battery pack.

118

Power Supply

When the external battery begins to fail and an internal battery pack is not used

First load the camcorder with a fully charged internal battery pack, then remove the DC output cable of the external battery from the DC IN connector. The power source will switch to the internal battery pack. To use an external battery again, connect a fully charged external battery to the DC IN connector before unloading the internal battery pack. The power source will switch to the external battery.

Continuous operation when operating with only an internal battery pack

First, connect a fully charged external battery to the DC IN connector, then change the internal battery.

Notes

• When an internal battery pack is loaded and an external battery is connected to the DC IN connector, the external battery is always used as the power source.

• There may be some noise on the video signal at the instant the power sources are switched.

7-2 Adjusting the

Viewfinder

Caution

When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the camera

(or the camcorder) with the eyepiece facing the sun. Direct sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the viewfinder and cause fire.

For maximum viewing convenience, you can adjust the viewfinder position in the left-right and backward-forward directions.

7-2-1 Adjusting the Viewfinder

Position

Adjusting the position to the right or left

7-1-3 Using an AC Adaptor

Mount the AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack, then connect to the AC power supply. The

AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power.

to an AC power source

7-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer

Ultralight System

By fitting the camcorder with the Anton Bauer Ultralight system, and setting the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can switch the light on and off automatically as you start and stop VTR operation. This system operates with lights powered by 12 V, with a maximum power consumption of

50 W.

1

Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.

2

Adjust the viewfinder to the most convenient position for viewing by sliding it to the right or left.

3

Tighten the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.

To store the camcorder in the carrying case

Always store the camcorder with the viewfinder moved fully in the direction opposite to the barrel and the viewfinder left-right positioning ring tightened.

Adjusting the Viewfinder

119

Adjusting the position backward or forward

BRIGHT control

CONTRAST control

PEAKING control

1

Loosen the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever and the LOCK knob.

2

Adjust the viewfinder to the most convenient position for viewing by sliding it backward or forward.

3

Tighten the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever and the LOCK knob.

7-2-3 Detaching the Viewfinder

Viewfinder stopper

7-2-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder

Focus and Screen

Adjusting the viewfinder focus

Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest.

Diopter adjustment ring

Adjusting the viewfinder screen

Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below:

1

Point the viewfinder barrel up or down.

2

Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.

3

Holding the viewfinder stopper up, slide the viewfinder in the direction indicated by the arrow and detach it.

4

Remove the viewfinder cable and microphone cable from the clamps and disconnect them.

Using the viewfinder rotation bracket

By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket (not supplied), you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder.

120

Adjusting the Viewfinder

viewfinder barrel. Then insert the eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel.

Red mark on the end of the eyepiece

For more information, refer to the BKW-401 manual.

7-2-4 Detaching the Eyepiece

Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen from further away. It is also easy to remove dust from the viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is detached.

1

Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise, to align the red marks on the locking ring and the viewfinder barrel.

3

Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its

“LOCK” arrow points at the red mark on the viewfinder barrel.

Note

When the eyecup is worn out, replace it with a new one

(service part number 3-723-079-03).

Red mark

Red mark

Locking ring

2

Detach the eyepiece.

Line up the red marks.

To reattach the eyepiece

1

Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel.

2

Align the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the

Adjusting the Viewfinder

121

7-3 Mounting the Lens

For information about using the lens, refer to the lens manual.

7-4 Adjusting the Flange

Focal Length

If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the flange focal length

(the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane). Make this adjustment after mounting or changing the lens.

Adjusting the flange focal length

The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check the identification of the various controls in the lens manual.

1

Push the lens mount lever upward and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount.

2

Align the center slot in the lens mount with the center pin on the lens and insert the lens into the mount.

3

Holding the lens in place, push the lens mount lever downward to mount the lens.

Note

If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked.

4

Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.

Note

Connecting a cable to the LENS connector while in powered status may cause a malfunction or damage the unit. Turn off the power before you make a connection with the LENS connector.

5

Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps.

About 3 m (10 ft)

1

Set the iris to manual.

2

Open the iris. Place the flange focal length adjustment chart about 3 m (10 ft) away from the camera, lit well enough to provide a satisfactory video output level.

3

Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment ring).

4

Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto.

5

Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it.

6

Set the zoom ring to wide angle.

7

Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus, being careful not to disturb the focus ring.

8

Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto.

9

Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.

122

Mounting the Lens / Adjusting the Flange Focal Length

7-5 Audio Input System

Tighten the screw.

Place the microphone in the holder so that “UP” is at the top.

7-5-1 Using the Supplied

Microphone

The camcorder’s MIC IN connector is an XLR-5-pin

(female), which you can use to attach the supplied stereo microphone.

You can use the supplied microphone either detached from or attached to the camcorder.

Using the microphone detached from the camcorder

Close the microphone holder.

3

Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN CH-1, CH-2, CH-3 and/or CH4 switch(es) for the desired recording channel to

FRONT or F.

Clamp of the

Microphone holder

Connect to the MIC IN connector.

Connect to the MIC IN connector.

Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/

CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches for the desired audio recording channel to

FRONT or F.

Note

When using the supplied microphone with an extension cable, always use an external power supply type cable.

Using the microphone attached to the camcorder

When an optional HDVF-20A HD Electronic Viewfinder is used, attach the microphone as follows.

1

Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp.

Recording stereo sound

You can record either stereo sound or monaural sound using the supplied stereo microphone.

To record stereo sound:

To record the L and R audio signals of stereo sound in channels 1 and 2, set both AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to FRONT.

To record the L and R audio signals of stereo sound in channels 3 and 4, set both AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches to F.

Confirm that FRONT MIC SELECT on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu is set to STEREO.

At the factory, the function of FRONT MIC SELECT is assigned to ASSIGN 2 (slide type). Slide the ASSIGN 2 switch to the front (lens side). If you have removed the

FRONT MIC SELECT function from the ASSIGN 2 switch, set FRONT MIC SELECT to STREO on the

FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu (STREO is selected at the factory).

To record monaural sound:

Set the appropriate AUDIO IN CH-1, CH-2, CH-3 and/or

CH-4 switch(es) corresponding to the channel(s) to which you want to record to FRONT or F.

Set the front microphone selection function to MONO.

2

Place the microphone in the microphone holder.

Audio Input System

123

When an optional HDVF-C30W HD

Electronic Viewfinder is used

The HDVF-C30W is not equipped with a microphone holder. Attach an optional microphone bracket (Part No.

A-8279-919-A) to the HDVF-C30W first, then attach the supplied microphone.

1

Attach the microphone bracket (Part No. A-8279-919-

A) to the HDVF-C30W, using the 4 screws (+B2.6 x 6) supplied with the microphone bracket.

Plug

VF connector

Microphone bracket

(Part No. A-8279-919-A)

HDVF-C30W

2

Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring on the camcorder, and engage the slide rail on the viewfinder with the slide guide on the camcorder.

Note

When an HDVF-C30W is connected, “NG” or “– –” is displayed for EEPROM STATUS on the DEV STATUS

page (page 169) of the DIAGNOSIS menu. However, this

is not a malfunction.

Slide rail

Stopper

Slide guide

Viewfinder left-right positioning ring

3

Position the viewfinder by sliding it from side to side, and tighten the viewfinder left-right positioning ring on the camcorder. Then connect the plug to the VF connector on the camcorder.

7-5-2 Using an External Microphone

You can connect up to two external microphones using the

AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors.

Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC switch to MIC.

When using a condenser microphone that requires external power (phantom power), set the +48 V/OFF switch to

+48 V.

If the microphone being used does not require external power (dynamic microphone), set the +48 V/OFF switch to OFF.

124

Audio Input System

Using a detached external microphone

3

Open the CAC-12 and remove the microphone adaptor.

LINE / AES/EBU / MIC switch:

Set this switch to MIC.

+48V/OFF switch:

Set this switch to +48V when using an external power supply type microphone.

Set to OFF when using an internal power supply type microphone.

AUDIO IN

CH 1 or CH 2

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches:

Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switch corresponding to the channel to which the microphone is connected to REAR.

External microphone

Note

In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector, use an adaptor.

Using an external microphone attached to the camcorder

You can attach an external microphone to the camcorder using the optional CAC-12 microphone holder.

1

Remove the fixing screws for the external microphone holder.

Open the CAC-12.

Microphone adaptor

1)

Loosen the screw.

1) Attach the microphone adaptor when using a smalldiameter external microphone.

4

Place an electret condenser microphone such as ECM-

678 in the CAC-12.

Close the CAC-12.

Tighten the screw.

f

ECM-678 or similar microphone

2

Attach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder.

Screws removed in step 1

CAC-12

5

Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC switch to MIC.

Set the +48 V/OFF switch to +48 V if you use an external power supply type microphone. Otherwise, set the switch to OFF.

Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2 connector.

Note

When you detach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder once you have attached it to the camcorder, be careful not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12. After detaching the

CAC-12, be sure to put the two screws back into their original places (see the figure illustrating the step 1

operation).

Audio Input System

125

7-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable

Tuner (for a UHF Wireless

Microphone System)

To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system, attach one of the following UHF portable tuners.

• WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit

• WRR-861A/861B/862A/862B UHF Portable Tuner.

For each of these UHF portable tuners, use the following attachment procedure.

For details, refer to the UHF portable tuner manual.

Fitting the WRR-855A/855B

You can use the WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized

Tuner Unit simply by inserting it into the slot in the camcorder, and fastening the fixing screws.

1

Undo the four fixing screws holding the cover of the slot, and remove the cover.

Fitting the WRR-861A/861B/862A/862B

(with a battery pack)

1

(1) Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not supplied, service part number: A-8278-057-A) to the back of the camcorder.

1

Use a Phillips-type screwdriver to tighten the four screws placed in the tuner fitting. For three of these screws, insert the screwdriver through the corresponding hole and tighten the screw.

2

Loosen the adjustment screws.

3

Adjust the tuner fitting position for a battery pack to be attached, and tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position.

4

Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR-

861A/861B/862A/862B.

(2) Attach the battery pack.

For details about attaching the battery pack, see “7-1-

1 Using a Battery Pack” on page 118.

Battery Pack

2

Insert the WRR-855A/855B, and fasten the four fixing screws.

WRR-855A/855B

Adjustment screws

Mount plate (supplied with WRR-861A/

861B/862A/862B)

Back of camcorder

Screwdriver

2

Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting.

Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches for the desired audio recording channel to WIRELESS or W.

For the operation of the WRR-855A/855B, refer to the manual supplied with the WRR-855A/855B.

WRR-861A/861B/

862A/862B

126

Audio Input System

3

Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT connector of the camcorder, and the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.

7-6 Tripod Mounting

Set the LINE / AES/

EBU / MIC switch for the channel to which the audio out cable is attached to MIC, and set the +48V/OFF switch to OFF.

You can easily mount and dismount the camcorder on a tripod by using the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not supplied).

1

Attach the tripod adaptor to the tripod.

Tripod adaptor

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches:

Set the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch for the channel to which the audio output cable is connected to REAR.

to AUDIO IN CH1 or

CH2 connector to DC OUT connector

Camera mount

2

Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.

7-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio

Equipment

Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO

IN CH1 or CH2 connector.

Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks.

Set the LINE / AES/EBU

/ MIC switch for the channel to which the audio out cable is attached to LINE.

AUDIO IN

CH 1 or CH 2

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches:

Set the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch corresponding to the channel to which the audio equipment is connected to REAR.

Audio equipment

Removing the camcorder from the tripod adaptor

Lever

Red button

While pressing the red button against the lever, move the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Note

The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press

Tripod Mounting

127

the red button against the lever a second time and move the lever as shown below until the pin returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains in the engaged position, you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.

7-7 Attaching/Detaching the Shoulder Strap

Attaching the shoulder strap

Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown below:

Stowed position

Pin

Shoulder strap post

Clip

Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.

Removing the shoulder strap

Press here and pull in the direction shown by the arrow to release.

128

Attaching/Detaching the Shoulder Strap

7-8 Adjusting the

Shoulder Pad Position

7-9 Attaching the Rain

Cover (Not Supplied)

You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position

(factory setting) backward by up to 10 mm (3/8 inch) or forward by up to 25 mm (1 inch). This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder.

Attach the rain cover (part number 3-191-064-02) as illustrated below. You can insert and remove cassette tapes, operate various switches and controls, and mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor with the rain cover attached.

When a shoulder belt is not used, cover the holes on the rain cover with caps.

When you use a shoulder strap, use these holes.

For details, see the following diagram.

Bottom

Shoulder pad

1

Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad.

2

Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position.

3

Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position.

Rear

Front

Velcro tape Drawstring

Remove the cap, and then pass the shoulder strap post clearly through this hole on the rain cover.

Insert the viewfinder barrel here with the eyecup out and fasten the drawstring around the eyecup.

Drawstring

Velcro tape

Velcro tape

Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position / Attaching the Rain Cover (Not Supplied)

129

7-10 Connecting the

Remote Control Unit

Connecting an optional RM-B150/B750 Remote Control

Unit enables remote control of the principal camera functions.

Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE connector (8-pin) automatically puts the camcorder into remote control mode. If you disconnect the remote control unit, the remote control mode is cancelled.

RM-B150/B750

REMOTE connector

Remote control cable

Camcorder switch functions when the remote control unit is connected

The following switches on the camcorder do not function.

• GAIN selector

• OUTPUT/DCC switch

• WHITE BAL switch

• AUTO W/B BAL switch

• SHUTTER selector

• TURBO GAIN button (ASSIGN 1 switch to which the

TURBO GAIN function is assigned)

• VTR START button (VTR button on the lens and the

ASSIGN 1 or the TURBO GAIN button to which the

VTR START/STOP function is assigned) (When the

VTR START/STOP item on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM.)

For details of the function of the VTR START button, see

the item “Function of the VTR START button when the remote control unit is connected” on page 130.

Paint adjustment when the remote control unit is connected

If RM COMMON MEMORY is set to OFF on the

FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled.

Function of the VTR START button when the remote control unit is connected

You can select the function of the VTR START button on the camcorder when the remote control unit is connected, using the VTR START/STOP item on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

To disable the camcorder VTR START button and the lens VTR button

On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set VTR START/STOP to RM.

If the same function as that of the VTR START/STOP button is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO

GAIN button, this setting also disables these controls.

To enable the camcorder VTR START button and the lens VTR button

On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set VTR START/STOP to CAM or PARA.

If the same function as that of the VTR START/STOP button is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO

GAIN button, this setting also enables these controls.

When VTR START/STOP is set to CAM, the VTR button on the remote control unit disables.

When the monitor is connected to the remote control unit

The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RM-B150/

B750 outputs the same signal as that from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder.

Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150/B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the

RM-B150/B750.

When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder

The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect before the remote control unit was connected.

By making a menu setting, the setting of the paint adjustment made with the remote control unit can be retained even after the remote control unit is removed from the camcorder.

For details, see “Structure of the paint adjustment data”

below.

Structure of the paint adjustment data

The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used for storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as shown below: one is the “independent data region” that is used when a remote control unit is not connected, and the other is the “remote control data region” that is used when a remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is automatically selected and output to the hardware of the

130

Connecting the Remote Control Unit

camcorder depending on whether or not a remote control unit, such as the RM-B150/B750, is connected.

Setup menu of the camcorder

RM-B150/

B750

Non-volatile memory

Independent data region

MASTER BLACK

MASTER GAMMA

KNEE POINT

DETAIL LEVEL

R/B GAIN

R/B BLACK

Hardware of the camera

Remote control data region

MASTER BLACK

MASTER GAMMA

KNEE POINT

DETAIL LEVEL

R/B GAIN

R/B BLACK

RM-B150/B750 connected

RM-B150/B750 not connected

As a result, when a remote control unit is connected to the camcorder, the effective data region is switched to the

“remote control data region” and the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect last time the remote control unit was used are recalled.

Settings of the absolute value volume

1) switches

2)

and absolute value

are overwritten by those on the remote control unit after the remote control unit is connected.

When the remote control unit is removed from the camcorder, the “independent data region” becomes effective. As a result, the camcorder will return to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected.

1) Absolute value volume

The data corresponding to the rotation degree (position) of the volume knob is output. The data corresponding to the rotation amount (change) is called the relative value volume.

2) Absolute value switch

Toggle switches or slide switches (except the temporary switches) (or controls) whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches.

To use settings of the paint adjustment data stored in the “independent data region” even when you disconnect a remote control unit

Set RM COMMON MEMORY to ON on the FUNCTION

3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

In this case, the settings stored in the “independent data region” will be renewed according to the change of settings in the “remote control data region.” As a result, the settings of the paint data made with the remote control unit can be retained even if the remote control unit is removed.

However, if the switch position on the remote control unit differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote control unit.

For details on menu operations, see “5-1-2 Basic Menu

Operations” on page 76.

To maintain the video quality when a remote control unit is connected

Set RM COMMON MEMORY to ON on the FUNCTION

3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, and set all the volume values on the remote control unit to the relative volume values. When a remote control unit has an absolute value switch, the settings of the absolute volume switch have a priority over relative value volume settings.

For detailed information on how to set relative volume value settings, refer to the operation manual supplied with the remote control unit.

Connecting the Remote Control Unit

131

Maintenance

Chapter

8

8-1 Testing the

Camcorder Before

Shooting

Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting session, preferably by operating the camcorder together with a color video monitor.

8-1-1 Preparations for Testing

Condensation

If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a warm place, or use it in a damp location, condensation may form on the head drum. Then, if the camcorder is operated in this state, the tape may adhere to the drum and cause a failure or even permanent damage. Do the following to prevent this from happening.

• When moving the camcorder from a cold place to a warm place, be sure no cassette is loaded in the camcorder.

• Whenever you turn on the power, check that the HUMID indicator does not appear. If it appears, wait until it disappears before loading a cassette.

For more information, see “3-1-1 Loading and Unloading

a Cassette” on page 35 and “8-4 Operation Warnings” on page 139.

8-1-2 Testing the Camera

Set the switches and selectors as follows:

Iris: Automatic

1

Attach a fully charged battery pack.

2

Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the

HUMID indicator does not appear and that the battery power level is sufficient.

If the HUMID indicator appears, wait until it disappears.

3

Check that there are no obstructions near the cassette lid, then push the EJECT button to open the cassette lid.

4

After checking the points below, load the cassette and close the cassette lid.

• The cassette is not write-protected.

• There is no slack in the tape.

• Condensation does not form in the tape.

Zoom: SERVO/MAN

VTR SAVE/STBY: SAVE

GAIN: Set as low as possible.

WHITE BAL: A or B

OUTPUT/DCC: BARS

Testing the viewfinder

1

Adjust the position of the viewfinder.

2

Check that the color bars are displayed on the viewfinder screen, and adjust the BRIGHT,

132

Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting

CONTRAST, and PEAKING controls to give the best color bar display.

3

Check each of the following operations.

• The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen.

• Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page changes to the next page.

• Push the MENU knob and check that settings of each item of the selected page are displayed.

• Turn the MENU knob and check that the b

mark moves within the page.

• Push the MENU knob and check that the b

mark placed before the item changes to a z mark and the z mark placed before the setting of the item changes to a ? mark.

• Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of the selected item changes.

4

Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM, and change the inner FILTER (ND filter) selector position in the sequence of 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the outer FILTER (CC filter) selector position in the sequence B, C, D, A and

B.

Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder screen displays the correct numbers.

5

Carry out of the following operations, and check that that the indicator lights if the corresponding item has been turned on the ‘!’ LED page of the USER menu.

• Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN selector and the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu.

• Set the SHUTTER selector to ON.

• Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.

• Set the 5600K mode to ON on the FUNCTION 2 page.

• Use the lens extender.

• Set the inner FILTER (ND filter) selector to anything but 1.

• Set the outer FILTER (CC filter) selector to anything but B.

• Set the reference value of the auto iris adjustment to a value other than the standard value.

• Set the frame frequency to one other than 23.98PsF.

Note

When conditions to make the indicator light were changed on the ‘!’ LED page, indicator lighting operations follow the settings on the ‘!’ LED page.

6

Move the SHUTTER selector from ON to SEL repeatedly, and check that the shutter setting changes on the viewfinder screen.

7

Pointing the camera at a suitable subject, focus the camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen.

8

Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT, and check that when sound is input to a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the camcorder, the audio level indicators appear on the viewfinder screen.

9

Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the viewfinder screen.

Note

The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as expected, depending on the settings relating to the viewfinder display function. In this case, set the desired items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu.

For details, see “5-2-2 Selecting Display Items” on page

84.

Testing the iris and zoom functions

1

Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that the power zoom operates correctly.

2

Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom functions manually.

3

Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the camera at objects of different brightness. Check that the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly.

4

Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and check that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris correctly.

5

Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check the following points when the GAIN selector is moved from L to M to H.

• For objects of the same brightness, the iris is adjusted to correspond to the change in setting.

• The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes to correspond to the change in setting.

6

If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens, set the extender lever of the lens into the 2x position and check the following points.

• The indication “EX” appears at the top left on the viewfinder screen.

• The auto iris functions correctly.

Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting

133

8-1-3 Testing the VTR

Perform tests (1) to (6) consecutively.

(1) Testing the tape transport functions

1

Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to VTR SAVE and check that the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on.

2

Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY and check that the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off.

3

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN to R-RUN.

4

Set the DISPLAY switch to CTL.

5

Press the VTR START button and check the following points.

• The tape reels are turning.

• The counter indication is changing.

• The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on.

• The RF and SERVO indicators on the display panel are off.

6

Press the VTR START button again and check that the tape stops and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off.

7

Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6, this time using the

VTR button on the lens.

8

Press the RESET button and check that the indication in the counter display is “00:00:00:00.”

9

Turn on the LCD LIGHT switch and check that the display panel is illuminated.

10

Hold down the REW button to rewind the tape for a while, then push the PLAY button. Check that the rewind and playback functions operate normally.

11

Press the STOP button and press the F FWD button.

Check that the fast forward function operates normally.

(2) Testing the automatic audio level adjusting functions

1

Set the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to

FRONT.

2

Set the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to

AUTO.

3

Set the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-1/2.

4

Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source. Check that the level indications for channels 1 and 2 correspond to the sound level, respectively.

5

Set the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches to F.

6

Set AUDIO SELECT CH3 and AUDIO SELECT CH4 to AUTO on the AUDIO-3 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

7

Set the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-3/4.

8

Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source. Check that the level indications for both channels 3 and 4 correspond to the sound level.

9

Be sure to reset the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-1/2 after checking the channels 3 and 4.

(3) Testing the manual audio level adjusting functions

1

Set the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to

FRONT.

2

Set the AUDIO SELECT CH-1 and CH-2 switches to

MANUAL.

3

Set the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-1/2.

4

Turn the MIC LEVEL control. Check that the channel-

1 and -2 audio level meter in the display panel increases segments as you turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder.

5

Set the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches to F.

6

Set AUDIO SELECT CH3 and AUDIO SELECT CH4 to MANU on the AUDIO-3 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

7

Set the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-3/4.

8

Check that the channel-3 and -4 audio level meters on the display show respective increases segments as you increase the values of LVL CONROL CH3 and LVL

CONTROL CH4 on the AUDIO-3 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

9

Be sure to reset the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-1/2 after checking the channels 3 and 4.

134

Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting

(4) Testing the earphone and speaker

1

Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the speaker volume changes accordingly.

2

Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE jack.

Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you can hear the sound from the microphone in the earphone.

3

Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the earphone volume changes accordingly.

4

Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack.

Check the earphone as in step 3.

(5) Testing external microphones.

1

Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector that corresponds to the channel to which the external microphone will be connected in step 2 to MIC and set the +48 V/OFF switch as follows.

• If the connected microphone has an internal power supply, set the switch to OFF.

• If the connected microphone has an external power supply, set the switch to +48V.

2

Connect an external microphone to either the AUDIO

IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2 connector.

3

Set the AUDIO IN switch that corresponds to the channel to which the external microphone is connected to REAR.

4

Aim the microphones at a sound source.

5

Check that the audio level meter in the display panel and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level.

(6) Checking the user bit and time code functions

1

Set the user bits as required.

For the operation, see “4-5-3 Setting the User Bits” on page 73.

2

Set the time code.

For the operation, see “4-5-1 Setting the Time Code” on page 72.

3

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.

4

Press the VTR START button, and check that recording starts and that the counter indication changes.

5

Press the VTR START button again, and check that the tape stops and that the counter indication also stops changing.

6

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN, and check that the counter indication changes regardless of whether the tape is running.

7

Set the DISPLAY switch to DATA and the DATA

DISPLAY switch to U-BIT, and check that the user bit data that was set is displayed.

Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting

135

8-2 Maintenance

8-2-1 Cleaning the Video Heads

To clean the video heads, use a Sony BCT-HD12CL

Cleaning Cassette. Follow the instructions given with the cleaning cassette, as incorrect or excessive use could damage the video heads.

To clean the heads, perform the following:

Load the cleaning cassette according to the procedure

described in “Loading a cassette” (page 35).

The tape runs automatically in PLAY mode for about 5 seconds to clean the head.

After the tape runs, the cleaning cassette is automatically ejected.

Note

Do not run the cleaning cassette more than 5 times consecutively.

2

Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder.

3

Remove the protecting filter, together with the packing ring, from inside the eyecup holder.

4

Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring.

Fog-proof filter

Depending on the temperature and humidity, the protecting filter may mist because of vapor or your breath. To ensure that the viewfinder is always clear, replace the protecting filter with a fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11, not supplied).

Fitting the fog-proof filter

Replace the protecting filter on the packing with the fogproof filter.

Be sure to correctly assemble the fog-proof filter, the packing, and the eyecup so that the reassembled eyepiece is waterproof.

Note

When cleaning the fog-proof filter, wipe it very gently with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti-fogging coating.

8-2-2 Cleaning the Viewfinder

Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.

Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner.

Caution

Never use organic solvents such as thinner.

Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning

8-2-3 Cleaning the Tape Transport

System

In order to utilize the capability and obtain the best performance of the camcorder and to prolong the life of the camcorder and the cassette tape, cleaning the tape transport system regularly is recommended.

For details on how and when to clean the tape transport system, contact your nearest Sony dealer.

Viewfinder barrel

Eyecup holder

Protecting filter

Packing ring

Eyecup

8-2-4 Performing Maintenance After

Use Under Severe Condition

After using the camcorder in dusty location, or near beach or hot spring, or when water has got inside the camcorder due to bad weather or similar situations, inspection and cleaning is recommended.

For details on inspection and cleaning, contact your nearest Sony dealer.

1

Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel.

For the detaching procedure, see “7-2-4 Detaching the

Eyepiece” on page 121.

136

Maintenance

8-2-5 Note About the Battery

Terminal

The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable part.

The unit may not operate properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.

If you notice bending, deformation, or surface corrosion, contact your dealer or a Sony service representative as soon as possible to have the battery terminal replaced.

Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime.

Contact your dealer or a Sony service representative for more information about inspections.

8-3 Periodic Inspection

In order to utilize the capability and obtain the best performance of the camcorder and to prolong the life of the camcorder and the cassette tape, periodic inspection is recommended.

8-3-1 Hours Meter

To display the hours meter on the viewfinder, proceed as follows.

It is recommended to use the hour meter indication as a guide for periodic inspection.

1

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU knob.

2

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to

DIAGNOSIS, then push the MENU knob.

When the DIAGNOSIS menu is used for the first time, the CONTENTS page appears.

Or, if you have used the DIAGNOSIS menu before, the page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended appears.

3

When the CONTENTS page is displayed, push the

MENU knob once, then turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to HOURS METER, and then push the

MENU knob.

When any page of the DIAGNOSIS menu is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the HOURS METER page appears.

The following items are indicated.

Periodic Inspection

137

Indication Meaning

DRUM RUNNING XXXXH Total duration of drum rotation (in units of hour)

TAPE RUNNING XXXXH Total duration of tape transport (in units of hour)

OPERATION XXXXH Total duration of poweron status (in units of hour)

THREADING XXXX Total number of threadings

DRUM RUNNING-2 XXXXH Duration of drum rotation

1)

TAPE RUNNING-2 XXXXH Duration of tape transport

1)

OPERATION-2 XXXXH Duration of power-on status

1)

THREADING-2 XXXX

Number of threadings

1)

1) Resettable

4

To turn off the hours meter, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

8-3-2 List of Parts for the Periodic Inspection

The table below indicates the approximate time until each part needs replacement or maintenance. Note that the indicated time does not necessarily mean the guaranteed period of service condition. The time when the part needs replacement or maintenance differs depending on the environment and conditions of use.

No.

9

10

11

12

13

14

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Part

Upper drum assembly

Slip ring assembly

Brush assembly

Total drum assembly

AHC roller assembly

CR washer

Timing belt

S tension regulator band assembly

T tension regulator band assembly

Pinch roller assembly

Reel drive assemblt

S tension regulator arm assembly

S idler assembly (LOW)

T idler assembly

Guide for replacement or maintenance

A

A

B

B

A

A

B

B

A

A

A

A

A

A

R

R

O

G

R

R

R

2000

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

O

G

Hours

4000

r r r

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

6000

R

R

R

R

R

A) “1. DRUM RUNNING” or “5. DRUM RUNNING-2” of the hours meter

(duration of drum rotation (in units of hour)).

B) “2. TAPE RUNNING” or “6. TAPE RUNNING-2” of the hours meter

(duration of tape transport (in units of hour)).

R) Replacement is required.

r) Replaced with the part pointed by the arrow (r).

O) Coat with oil.

G) Coat with grease.

For details on periodic inspection, contact your nearest

Sony dealer.

138

Periodic Inspection

8-4 Operation Warnings

When a problem occurs at power on or during operation, a warning is given by the relevant indicators in the display panel, in the viewfinder and on the camcorder body. The speaker and earphone also give audible warnings.

Operation warnings

Display panel

Warning/

Battery status indication

Status

(Flashing/

Lit)

RF

SERVO

HUMID!

SLACK

TAPE

TAPE and

E

BATT

BATT and

E

Lit

Lit

Lit

Lit

1)

Flashing

Flashing

Flashing

Flashing

1)

Indicators in viewfinder

: Lit

: 1 flash/s

: 4 flashes/s

WARNING REC/tally BATT

Warning sounds

:

4 beeps/s

:

1 beep/s

:

Continuous beep

1)

1)

1)

Problem VTR operation Action to take

2)

Video head gap clogged or problem in recording circuit

After clogged head or failure in power supply system for the drum recorder is detected, recording continues but may be substandard.

Clean the head. If recording is still substandard, turn off the power, and consult your

Sony service representative

Servo lock lost

Recording continuous but may be substandard.

Turn off the power and contact your Sony service representative.

(This indication may be given momentarily when the tape starts moving, but this does not indicate a problem.)

Condensation on the optical pickup.

Recording continues but stops if the tape sticks to the head drum.

Playback, fast forward, and rewind do not operate.

Stop the tape, and wait until the HUMID indicator disappears.

Failure in the tape transport mechanism.

VTR stops. An error code appears in the time code display section of the display panel. Look up the error code in the Maintenance

Manual.

Remove the cassette by the method described in the Maintenance Manual.

Close the cassette lid without loading a cassette, turn off the power, and consult your

Sony service representative.

Near the end of tape

End of tape

Operation continues.

Recording stops.

Be prepared to change the cassette.

Change the cassette.

4) Battery almost exhausted.

Operation continues.

5)

Battery exhausted.

Operation stops.

Change the battery.

Change the battery.

1) During recording

2) During playback, fast forward, rewinding or stop

3) Additionally “5-0” appears for the tape remaining indication.

4) During recording or in stop mode

5) The VTR once stops recording in auto interval recording mode.

Operation Warnings

139

Operation/error messages

An operation or error message is displayed in the

operation/error message display area (see page 83) in the

viewfinder.

Operation/error message

AUTO INTERVAL

**M**S

MANU INTERVAL

*FRAME

INTERVAL **S(M/

H)*FRAME

LOW LIGHT

TAPE REC INH.

TELE FILE:

MEMORY FULL

TELE FILE: NEAR

FULL

Retake Search

Failed

Humid Disturbed

INT REC

INVALID

OPERATION !

ON-BOARD

BATTERY EMPTY

Power OFF &

Manual Eject

Full Top Sensor

Error

Meaning

Indicates the camera is in the Auto

Interval Rec mode. **M**S indicates the shooting interval.

Indicates the camera is in the single shot mode of the Manual Interval Rec mode. *FRAME indicates the number of frames.

Indicates the camera is in the consecutive mode of the Manual

Interval Rec mode. **S(M/H) indicates the trigger interval and *FRAME indicates the number of frames.

Appears, if set to ON on the menu, to indicate the subject illumination is inadequate.

Appears when recording on a writeprotected cassette.

Appears when you load a cassette with a full memory label.

Appears when you load a cassette with a memory label that is near full.

Appears when the camcorder fails to position the tape at recording starting point when recording using the RE-

TAKE function.

1)

Appears when there are portions where recording has failed due to condensation while shooting pictures at intervals (using the interval rec function).

Appears when:

• there is only one recorded cut when recording using the RE-TAKE function.

• the recorded cuts are less than 3 sec. when recording using the RE-

TAKE function.

• the RE-TAKE function was denied for some reason, e.g. as Picture

Cache was on.

• when you execute the RE-TAKE operation before the recording pause operation has completed.

Appears when the backup battery for the internal clock has been used up.

2)

Indicates that the tape is not wound correctly (slacked). Turn off the power, and then unload the cassette manually.

3)

Indicates that the trouble of the full top sensor

4)

is detected. Replace the full top sensor

2)

.

Operation/error message

Meaning

VTR ERROR!

POWER OFF b ON

Indicates that the trouble of the MCU for controlling the VTR section is detected.

2)

REC Current ARM Indicates that the trouble of the power supply system for the drum recorder is detected. Recording continues but may not be substandard.

2)

1) In this case, position the tape at the point where you want to start the recording manually.

2) Contact your nearest Sony dealer.

3) For detailed information on how to unload the cassette manually, see

“Unloading a cassette manually (manual eject)” on page 36.

4) For detailed information on the full top sensor, refer to the Maintenance

Manual.

140

Operation Warnings

Appendixes

Specifications

General

Power voltage 12 V DC +5.0/–1.0 V

Power consumption

Approx. 34 W (with 12 V DC supply, when recording)

Operating temperature

0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Operating humidity

25% to 85% (relative humidity)

Storage temperature

–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)

Mass Approx. 5.4 kg (12 lb 2 oz) (with microphone, viewfinder, BCT-40HD cassette and BP-GL95 Battery Pack)

Dimensions in mm (inches)

Supplied accessories

Shoulder strap (1)

XLR connector cover (4)

Stereo microphone (super cardioid directional, external power supply type) (1)

Operation Guide

Japanese version (1)

Operation Manual

English version (1)

CD-ROM manual (1)

Video Camera Section

General

Imager

2

/

3

-inch type CCD with 2,000,000 pixels

Effective picture elements

1920 (H)

× 1080 (V)

Imager Configuration

RGB 3 CCDs

Spectral system F1.4 prism system (with quartz filter)

Built-in filters CC filter

A: 5600K

B: 3200K

C: 4300K

D: 6300K

ND filter

1: Clear

2:

4:

1

3:

1

1

/

/

4

ND

16

/

64

ND

ND

Special bayonet mount Lens mount

Sensitivity F10 standard (89.9% reflection chart,

2000 lx)

Minimum illumination

0.0024 1x (at F1.4, +42 dB gain, 64frame slow shutter)

Video S/N ratio 54 dB (Y typical)

Registration 0.02% or less for entire screen area

(excluding distortion due to lens)

Geometric distortion

None identified (excluding distortion

Smear due to lens)

–135 dB (Y-typical)

Stereo microphone

Type

Directivity

Back electret condenser microphone

Super cardioid

Frequency response

100 Hz to 15 kHz

Output impedance

70

Ω ±20%

Power voltage 48 V DC

Specifications

141

VTR Section

General

Usable cassette tapes

BCT-6HD/12HD/22HD/32HD/40HD

1/2-inch Digital HDCAM cassette tapes

Tape speed 96.7 mm/s (for 59.94i/29.97PsF format)

80.7 mm/s (for 50i/25PsF format)

77.4 mm/s (for 24PsF/23.98PsF format)

Record/playback time

For 59.94i/29.97PsF format: 40 minutes

(using BCT-40HD)

For 50i/25PsF format: 48 minutes

(using BCT-40HD)

For 24PsF/23.98PsF format: 50 minutes

(using BCT-40HD)

Fast forward time

Approx. 5 minutes (using BCT-40HD video cassette)

Rewind time Approx. 5 minutes (using BCT-40HD video cassette)

Continuous recording time

1)

Approx. 110 minutes (using BP-GL95

Battery Pack)

Approx. 80 minutes (using BP-GL65

Battery Pack)

1) When using an optional HDVF-20A HD Electronic Viewfinder and operating at the normal temperature of 25°C (77°F)

Digital video

Digital video signal format

Sampling frequency

Y: 74.25 MHz

Quantization

P

B

/P

R

: 37.125 MHz

10 bits/sample

(8 bits/sample for compression processing)

Compression Coefficient recording system

Channel coding S-NRZI PR-IV

Error correction Reed-Solomon code

Error concealment

Adaptive three dimensional

Audio (with standard playback machine)

Frequency response

20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5/–0.8 dB

Dynamic range 85 dB min. (emphasis ON)

Distortion (THD) 0.08% max.

Cross talk –70 dB max.

Wow and flutter Below measurable limit

Input/output connectors

Signal inputs

AUDIO IN CH1/CH2

XLR type, 3-pin, female

–60 dBu/–50 dBu/–40 dBu/+4 dBu/

AES/EBU (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.)

MIC IN XLR type, 5-pin, female –60 dBu/–50 dBu/–40 dBu

(LPF ON)

GENLOCK IN BNC type

1.0 Vp-p, 75

Ω, unbalanced

TC IN BNC type

0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 k

Ω

Signal outputs

TEST OUT BNC type

1.0 Vp-p, 75

Ω, unbalanced

HD-SDI OUT BNC type, 0.8 Vp-p, 75

Ω, unbalanced

AUDIO OUT XLR type, 5-pin, male, 0 dBm

TC OUT BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75

Ω

EARPHONE minijack

8

Ω, –∞ to –18 dBs variable

Others

DC IN

DC OUT

LENS

XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 to 17 V DC

4-pin, female, 11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current 0.1 A

12-pin

Recommended Additional

Equipment

Viewfinder

HDVF-20A HD Electronic Viewfinder

HDVF-C30W HD Electronic Viewfinder

Power supply and related equipment

BP-GL65/GL95/L60S Battery Pack

BC-L70/M150 Battery Charger

AC-DN10 AC Adaptor

HDCAM cassette tapes

BCT-6HD/12HD/22HD/32HD/40HD

Memory label

MLB-IM-100

Viewfinder and related equipment

BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket

142

Specifications

Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11)

Lens assembly (farsighted) (Part No. A-8262-537-A)

Lens assembly (low magnification) (Part No. A-8262-538-

A)

Lens assembly (standard magnification with special compensation for aberrations) (Part No. A-8267-737-A)

Optical attachments

ND filter (

1

ND filter (

1

/

8

ND) (Part No. 3-174-685-01)

/

32

ND) (Part No. 3-174-683-01)

Consult your Sony representative for more information about these filters.

Equipment for remote control

RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit

“Memory Stick”

MSH-32 (32 MB)

MSH-64 (64 MB)

MSH-128 (128 MB)

Audio equipment

ECM-674/678 Microphone

CAC-12 Microphone Holder

CCXA-53 Audio Cable (for converting 5-pin connector to two 3-pin connectors)

WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit

WRR-861A/861B/862A/862B UHF Portable Tuner

WRT-8B UHF Transmitter

WRR Tuner Fitting (service part number: A-8278-057-A)

For Audio equipment described above, confirm whether the connector is male or female and the number of pins on the connector.

The audio input connectors of the camcorder are female and 3-pin and 5-pin and the audio output connectors are male and 5-pin. A converting adaptor may be required depending on the audio equipment to be connected to the camcorder.

Extension boards

HKDW-702 Down Converter Board

HKDW-703 Picture Cache Board

HKDW-902R 2-3 Pull Down Down Converter Board

HKDW-905R Slow Shutter and Image Inverter Board

Equipment for maintenance and easier handling

BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette

LC-DN7 Hard Carrying Case

LC-DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case

Tripod Adaptor VCT-14

Rain cover (Part No. 3-191-064-02)

Maintenance Manual

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Notes

• Always make a test recording, and verify that it was recorded successfully.

SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY

KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON

ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS

RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS

OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO

RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.

• Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF

ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON

ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR

PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS

UNIT, EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR

AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR FOR

ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER.

Specifications

143

Menu List

In this section, tables are used to briefly explain menus that the camcorder provides for adjustments and settings.

For menu organization and the USER menu, see

Chapter 5.

Note

The page number displayed on the top line of the menu may be different if an optional extension board is installed.

OPERATION Menu

The following table lists and describes the items in the

OPERATION menu. Some pages of the OPERATION menu have been registered in the USER menu at the factory. These pages are indicated by a circle ( a

) in the

USER menu column. The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add and delete pages in the USER menu to suit your requirements.

USER menu

a

No.

01

Page Item

When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual.

Settings

OUTPUT SEL HD SDI OUT

SD REAR BNC OUT

1), 2)

TEST OUT SELECT

DOWN CON MODE

2)

VF Y 2-3PULLDOWN

3)

OFF/ON

OFF/VBS/SDI

HD/SD

CROP/SQEZE/

LETTR

OFF/ON

Default Description

ON

VBS

HD

CROP

OFF

See “5-3-2 Selecting Output

Signals” on page 94.

Selects the 2-3 pulldown Y signal for the viewfinder signal when either 23.98PsF or 24PsF is selected.

144

Menu List

USER menu

a

No.

02

Page Item

FUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW <1>

ASSIGN SW <2>

TURBO SW

FRONT MIC SELECT

DF/NDF

4)

END SEARCH

CACHE/INTVAL REC

(CACHE)

CACHE REC TIME

Settings Default Description

OFF / F. MIC MONO/

STEREO / PICTURE

CACHE ON/OFF /

TEST OUT

CHARACTER /

MARKER / RE-TAKE

/ ATW / RETURN

VIDEO / LENS RET /

REC SWITCH /

TURBO SWITCH /

TELE-FILE MARK /

ZEBRA / 5600K /

FREEZE MANUAL

TRIG

5600K

OFF / F. MIC MONO/

STEREO / PICTURE

CACHE ON/OFF /

TEST OUT

CHARACTER /

MARKER / ZEBRA /

5600K / CAM/

FREEZE SEL

F. MIC

OFF / F. MIC MONO/

STEREO / PICTURE

CACHE ON/OFF /

TEST OUT

CHARACTER /

MARKER / RE-TAKE

/ ATW / RETURN

VIDEO / LENS RET /

REC SWITCH /

TURBO SWITCH /

TELE-FILE MARK /

ZEBRA / 5600K /

FREEZE MANUAL

TRIG

TURBO

See “5-3-5 Assigning

Functions to Assignable

Switches” on page 96.

MONO/STREO

DF/NDF

OFF/ON

OFF/CACHE/A.INT/

M.INT

STREO Selects stereo or monaural when a stereo microphone is connected to the front MC IN connector.

DF Switches between drop frame

(DF) mode and non-drop frame (NDF) mode.

OFF

OFF

0/1/2/3/4/5/6/8

5)

SEC 0 SEC

Turns the END SEARCH function on/off.

See “3-2-5 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of Pre-

Stored Picture Data (Picture

Cache Function: with the

HKDW-703)” on page 41.

Menu List

145

USER menu

No.

03

Page Item Settings

(A.INT)

TAKE TOTAL TIME

(A.INT)

REC TIME

5/10/15/20/30/40/50

MIN,

1/2/3/4/5/7/10/15/20/

30/40/50/70/100 H

5/10/15/20/30/40/50

SEC, 1 to 50

6)

MIN

FUNCTION 2

(A.INT and M.INT except

TRIGGER INTERVAL set to M)

PRE-LIGHTING

OFF/2SEC/5SEC/

10SEC

(M.INT)

NUMBER OF FRAME

1/2/4/8

(M.INT)

TRIGGER INTERVAL

5600K

M, 1 to 10/15/20/30/

40/50 SEC,

1 to 10/15/20/30/40/

50 MIN,

1/2/3/4/6/12/24 H

OFF/ON

Default Description

5 MIN

5 SEC

OFF

1

M

OFF

See “3-2-6 Shooting Picture at Intervals (Interval Rec

Function: with the HKDW-

703)” on page 43.

WHITE SWITCH <B>

SHOCKLESS WHITE

ATW SPEED

LOW LIGHT

LOW LIGHT LEVEL

VF BATT WARNING

PB VIDEO

ABS (VF MENU)

MEM/ATW

OFF/1/2/3

1 to 5

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

10/20%

ALL/HDSDI

OFF/ON

MEM

1

4

OFF

0

10%

ALL

OFF

Turns the function which electrically applies a 5600K color temperature filter on and off.

Sets the function of the

WHITE BAL B switch.

Changes the white gain smoothly when operating the

WHITE BAL switch.

Changes the speed of the

Auto Tracing White operation.

Turns the warning display on/ off when the video average level is less than the preset value.

Sets the level at which the

LOW LIGHT function becomes effective.

Sets the threshold value of remaining battery capacity to make the remaining capacity indication flash.

Selects the output destination of the recorded video signals.

See “3-3-3 Checking the

Camera Picture on the

Viewfinder and/or Color Video

Monitor” on page 52.

Indicates the items indicated as relative values as absolute values. (Values of object items are highlighted.)

146

Menu List

USER menu

No.

04 a a a

05

06

07

Page

FREEZE

MIX

7)

VF DISP 1

VF DISP 2

‘!’ LED

Item

FREEZE

FREEZE AUTO TRIG

FREEZE MAN TRIG

FREEZE STOP TIME

CAM/FREEZE SEL

FREEZE/MIX SEL

FREEZE STATUS

VF DISP

VF DISPLAY MODE

DISP EXTENDER

DISP FILTER

DISP WHITE

DISP 5600K

DISP GAIN

DISP SHUTTER

DISP AUDIO

DISP TAPE

DISP IRIS

DISP ZOOM

DISP COLOR TEMP.

DISP BATT REMAIN

DISP DC IN

DISP WRR RF LVL

DISP FREEZE

DISP TIME CODE

GAIN

SHUTTER

<!>

<!>

WHITE BAL <!>

5600K <!>

ATW <!>

EXTENDER <!>

FILTER <!>

OVERRIDE <!>

FORMAT <!>

Settings Default Description

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

0S/0.5S/1.0S/1.5S/

2.0S

OFF

OFF/REC.S/REC.P

OFF

EXEC EXEC

1.0S

FREZE/CAM

FREZE/MIX

CLEAR/STORE

OFF/ON

FREZE

FREZE

CLEAR

OFF

1/2/3

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

3

ON

ON

ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

INT/VOLT/AUTO

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

INT

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF/ON OFF

See “5-3-11 Using the Freeze

Mix Function” on page 104.

See “5-2-2 Selecting Display

Items” on page 84.

See “5-2-2 Selecting Display

Items” on page 84.

See “5-3-11 Using the Freeze

Mix Function” on page 104.

See “5-2-2 Selecting Display

Items” on page 84.

See “5-2-4 Selecting the

Items for Which the ‘!’ LED is to Light” on page 86.

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Menu List

147

USER menu

No.

08 a 09

10

Page Item

‘!’ LED STD GAIN

SHUTTER

MARKER 1

MARKER 2

WHITE BAL

5600K

ATW

EXTENDER <!>

FILTER ND <!>

FILTER CC <!>

OVERRIDE <!>

FORMAT

MARKER

CENTER

CENTER MARK

SAFETY ZONE

SAFETY AREA

ASPECT

<!>

<!>

<!>

<!>

<!>

<!>

ASPECT SELECT

ASPECT MASK

ASPECT MASK LVL

100% MARKER

USER BOX

USER BOX WIDTH

USER BOX HEIGHT

USER BOX H POS.

USER BOX V POS.

CENTER H POS.

CENTER V POS.

ASPECT SAFE ZONE

ASPECT SAFE AREA

Settings Default Description

0dB/LOW/MID/HIGH 0dB

OFF/ECS/SLS/

1/33

8)

OFF

9)

P/A/B/PA/PB/AB

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

AB

OFF

OFF

OFF

1/2/3/4

A/B/C/D

OFF/ON

59.94/50i/23.98/

24PsF/25PsF/29.97

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

1/2/3/4

OFF/ON

80%/90%/92.5%/

95%

OFF/ON

15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/

1.85/2.35

OFF/ON

0 to 8

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

1 to 479

1

B

OFF

23.98

OFF

OFF

3

OFF

90%

OFF

4:3

OFF

0

OFF

OFF

240

See “5-2-4 Selecting the

Items for Which the ‘!’ LED is to Light” on page 86.

See “5-2-5 Setting Marker

Display” on page 87.

1 to 269

–480 to 479

–270 to 269

–479 to 479

–268 to 268

OFF/ON

80%/90%/92.5%/

95%

135

0

0

0

0

OFF

90%

Turns the box cursor on/off.

Adjusts the width (from the center to right or left side) of the box cursor.

Adjusts the height (from the center to top or bottom) of the box cursor.

Adjusts the H position of the center.

Adjusts the V position of the center.

Adjusts the H position of the center marker.

Adjusts the V position of the center marker.

Turns the SAFETY ZONE display on or off for the aspect mode selected in the

ASPECT SELECT item on the MARKER 1 page.

Selects the range of the aspect safety zone.

148

Menu List

USER menu

a

No.

11 a a a a a

12

13

14

15

16

Page Item

GAIN SW GAIN LOW

GAIN MID

GAIN HIGH

GAIN TURBO

TURBO SW IND

VF SETTING ZEBRA

ZEBRA SELECT

ZEBRA1 DET.LVL

ZEBRA2 DET.LVL

AUTO IRIS

SHOT ID

ASPECT

VF DETAIL LEVEL

VF DTL H LEVEL

VF DTL V LEVEL

IRIS OVERRIDE

IRIS SPEED

CLIP HIGH LIGHT

IRIS WINDOW

IRIS WINDOW IND

IRIS VAR WIDTH

IRIS VAR HEIGHT

IRIS VAR H POS.

IRIS VAR V POS.

ID-1

ID-2

ID-3

ID-4

SHOT DISP SHOT DATE

SHOT TIME

SHOT MODEL NAME

SHOT SERIAL NO

SHOT ID SEL

SHOT BLINK CHARA

SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL

STATUS FUNCTION

STATUS AUDIO

Settings

–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/

9dB/12dB/18dB/

24dB/30dB/36dB/

42dB

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

1/2/BOTH

50% to 105%

(1% steps)

95% to 105%

(1% steps)

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

0/1/2/3/4/5

OFF/ON

1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR

OFF/ON

20 to 479

20 to 269

–460 to 460

–249 to 249

12 characters

Default Description

0dB

6dB

12dB

100%

OFF

240

135

0

0

0

0

OFF

0

OFF

3

OFF

1

42dB

OFF

OFF

1

70%

See “5-3-1 Setting Gain

Values for the GAIN Selector

Positions” on page 93.

See “5-2-6 Setting the

Viewfinder” on page 88.

See “4-3 Changing the

Reference Value for

Automatic Iris Adjustment” on page 66.

See “5-2-8 Setting the Shot

ID” on page 89.

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/

ID-4

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

See “5-2-7 Recording Shot

Data Superimposed on the

Color Bars” on page 88.

See “5-2-9 Displaying the

Status Confirmation

Windows” on page 91.

Menu List

149

USER menu

No.

17

Page

TEST OUT

Item

TEST OUT MARKER

TEST OUT VF DISP

TEST OUT MENU

TEST OUT ZEBRA

OUTPUT SELECT

10)

Settings

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

Y/R/G/B

18

19

OFFSET

WHT

OFFSET WHITE <A>

OFFSET WHITE <B>

WARM COOL <B>

OFF/ON

WARM COOL <A> Display color temperature

WARM COOL BAL <A> (–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

Display color temperature

WARM COOL BAL <B> (–99 to 99)

SHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS OFF/ON

SHUTTER 1/32

SHUTTER 1/33

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

SHUTTER 1/40

SHUTTER 1/48

SHUTTER 1/50

SHUTTER 1/60

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

SHUTTER 1/96

SHUTTER 1/100

SHUTTER 1/120

SHUTTER 1/125

SHUTTER 1/250

SHUTTER 1/500

SHUTTER 1/1000

SHUTTER 1/2000

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

0

ON

ON

ON

OFF

3200

0

OFF

3200

Default Description

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Y

Selects whether or not the marker signal is mixed with the output signal from the

TEST OUT connector.

Selects whether or not the VF

DISP display signal is mixed with the output signal from the

TEST OUT connector.

Selects whether or not the

MENU display signal is mixed with the output signal from the

TEST OUT connector.

Selects whether or not the

ZEBRA display signal is mixed with the output signal from the TEST OUT connector.

Select the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the

VBS/SDI OUT

1)

.

See “5-3-4 Specifying an

Offset for the Auto White

Balance Setting” on page 95.

See “4-2 Setting the

Electronic Shutter” on page

62.

150

Menu List

USER menu

a

No.

20

21

Page

LENS FILE

UMID SET

Item

LENS FILE SELECT

F. ID

L. ID

L. MF

Settings

1 to 32

(Display only)

(Display only)

(Display only)

EX-OWNERSHIP REC OFF/ON

COUNTRY CODE 4 alphanumeric characters

ORGANIZATION 4 alphanumeric characters

USER CODE

INSTANCE NO

TIME ZONE

MACHINE

OFF

4 alphanumeric characters

RND/GEN RND

00 to 25, 1A to 1F, 2A to 2F, 32, 3A to 3F

00

n

Default Description

1

See “5-3-7 Selecting a Lens

File” on page 99.

To show the lens-specific ID

(when a serial lens is connected).

To show the name of the lens manufacturer (when a serial lens is connected).

See “5-3-8 Using UMID Data” on page 100.

1) When an optional HKDW-702/902R is installed, the HD-SDI OUT connector (located on the side of the camcorder) can be used as the VBS/SDI output connector.

2) This item is displayed when an optional HKDW-702/902R is installed.

When an HKDW-702 is installed, the SD output signal is not effective for 23.98PsF/24PsF. When an HKDW-902R is installed, the SD output signal is not effective for 24PsF. As a result, this menu operation is disabled in such a case.

3) This item is displayed when an optional HKDW-902R is installed. When one of 59.94i, 50i, 25PsF or 29.97PsF is selected, you cannot select this item.

4) When one of 50i, 25PsF, 24PsF or 23.98PsF is selected, this item is not displayed.

5) When either 59.94i or 29.97PsF is selected, the maximum setting is 7 (seconds). When one of 50i, 25PsF, 24PsF, or 23.98PsF is selected, the maximum setting is 8 (seconds).

6) When either 24PsF or 23.98PsF is selected, the maximum setting is 50 MIN.

When either 50i or 25PsF is selected, the maximum setting is 48 MIN.

When either 59.94i or 29.97PsF is selected, the maximum setting is 40 MIN.

7) This item is displayed when an optional HKDW-905R is installed.

8) The shutter speed depends on the selected frame frequency. See “4-2-1 Shutter Modes” on page 62.

9) When either 50i or 59.94i is selected, OFF is the default setting.

When either 23.98PsF or 24PsF is selected, 1/48. is the default setting.

When 25PsF is selected, 1/50 is the default setting.

When 29.97PsF is selected, 1/60 is the default setting.

10)When Y is selected in the camcorder with an optional HKDW-702/902R, the color signal is output from the connector whose selected output signal is an SD signal.

Menu List

151

PAINT Menu

The following table lists and describes the items in the

PAINT menu.

When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative

No.

P01

P02

Page

SW STATUS

WHITE

Item

GAMMA

BLACK GAMMA

MATRIX

KNEE

WHITE CLIP

DETAIL

APERTURE

FLARE

EVS

TEST SAW

COLOR TEMP <A>

C TEMP BAL <A>

Settings

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

ON/OFF

OFF/ON

OFF/ANALG/

DIGIT

Display color temperature

(–99 to 99) value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual.

ON

ON

ON

ON

Default Description

ON Turns the gamma correction on/off.

OFF

OFF

Turns the black gamma correction on/off.

Turns the linear matrix correction on/off.

Turns the knee correction on/off.

Turns the white clipping correction on/off.

Turns the detail signal on/off.

Turns the aperture function on/off.

ON

OFF

OFF

Turns the flare function on/off.

Turns the EVS shutter on/off.

Selects the test signal.

3200

0

P03

R GAIN <A>

B GAIN <A>

5600K <A>

COLOR TEMP <B>

C TEMP BAL <B>

R GAIN <B>

B GAIN <B>

5600K <B>

BLACK/FLARE MASTER BLACK

R BLACK

G BLACK

B BLACK

MASTER FLARE

R FLARE

G FLARE

B FLARE

FLARE

OUTPUT SELECT

1)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

Display color temperature

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

Y/R/G/B

0

0

OFF

3200

0

0

0

OFF

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

ON

Y

Sets the color temperature of WHITE A.

(Displayed one is a rough guide only)

Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through

COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.

Only the value of R GAIN is changed.

Only the value of B GAIN is changed.

Turns the WHITE A electronic 5600K filter on/ off.

Sets the color temperature of WHITE B.

(Displayed one is a rough guide only)

Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through

COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.

Only the value of R GAIN is changed.

Only the value of B GAIN is changed.

Turns the WHITE B electronic 5600K filter on/ off.

Adjusts the master black level.

Adjusts the R black level.

Adjusts the G black level.

Adjusts the B black level.

Adjusts the flare level of the master.

Adjusts the R flare level.

Adjusts the G flare level.

Adjusts the B flare level.

Turns the flare correction circuit on/off.

Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the VBS/SDI

OUT

2)

.

152

Menu List

No.

P04

P05

P06

P07

Page

GAMMA

BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA

KNEE 1

Item

GAMMA

STEP GAMMA

MASTER GAMMA

R GAMMA

G GAMMA

B GAMMA

OUTPUT SELECT

GAMMA SELECT

GAM SEL (STD)

GAM SEL (HG)

GAM SEL (USER)

1)

BLACK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/

H.MID/HIGH

MASTER BLK

GAMMA

(–99 to 99)

R BLACK GAMMA

G BLACK GAMMA

B BLACK GAMMA

OUTPUT SELECT

1)

Settings

OFF/ON

0.35 to 0.90

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

Y/R/G/B

STD/HG/USER STD

1 to 4

1 to 4

3

4

1 to 5

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

Y/R/G/B

0

Y

0

0

Default Description

ON

0.45

0

Turns the gamma correction function on/off.

Sets the master gamma correction curve in steps.

Sets the master gamma correction curve.

Sets the R gamma correction curve.

Sets the G gamma correction curve.

Sets the B gamma correction curve.

Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the VBS/SDI

OUT

2)

.

Selects the gamma table.

1

OFF

HIGH

0

0

0

0

Y

Selects the gamma table of STD.

Selects the hyper gamma table of hyper gamma.

Selects the gamma table loaded from the

“Memory Stick.”

Turns the black gamma correction on/off.

Sets the range affected by black gamma.

Adjusts the master black gamma.

Sets the correction curve of the R black gamma.

Sets the correction curve of the G black gamma.

Sets the correction curve of the B black gamma.

Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the VBS/SDI

OUT

2)

.

Turns the knee correction circuit on/off.

KNEE 2

KNEE

KNEE POINT (M)

KNEE SLOPE (M)

KNEE SATURATION

KNEE SAT LEVEL

OFF/ON

50.0 to 109.0

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

WHITE CLIP OFF/ON

WHITE CLIP LEVEL 100.0 to 109.5

ON

95.0

0

ON

0

ON

109.0

OFF

3)

Sets the master knee point level.

Set the master knee slope level.

Turns the knee saturation function on/off.

Sets the knee saturation level.

Turns the white clipping function on/off.

Adjusts the white clipping level.

KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON

KNEE POINT (R)

KNEE SLOPE (R)

–45.0 to 14.0

(–99 to 99)

KNEE POINT (G)

KNEE SLOPE (G)

KNEE POINT (B)

KNEE SLOPE (B)

–45.0 to 14.0

(–99 to 99)

–45.0 to 14.0

(–99 to 99)

0.0

0

00

0

0.0

0

Turns the knee saturation function on/off.

Sets the R knee point level.

Sets the R knee slope level.

Sets the G knee point level.

Sets the G knee slope level.

Sets the B knee point level.

Sets the B knee slope level.

Menu List

153

No.

P08

P09

P10

P11

Page

DETAIL 1

DETAIL 2

SD DETAIL

4)

SKIN DETAIL

Item

DETAIL

APERTURE

DETAIL LEVEL

APERTURE LEVEL

DTL H/V RATIO

CRISPENING

LEVEL DEPEND

Settings

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

(–1 to 14)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

LEVEL DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99)

DETAIL FREQ (–99 to 99)

KNEE APERTURE

KNEE APT LEVEL

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

DTL WHT LIMIT

DTL BLK LIMIT

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

DTL V-BLK LMT (–99 to 99)

H/V CONTROL MODE H/V / V

SD DETAIL

SD DETAIL LEVEL

SD CRISPENING

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

(0 to 15)

SD DTL WHT LIMIT

SD DTL BLK LIMIT

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

SD LEVEL DEPEND OFF/ON

SD LV DEPEND LVL (–8 to 3)

SD DTL FREQ.

SD DTL H/V RATIO

SD CROSS COLOR

5)

SKIN DETAIL ALL

(–2 to 1)

(–3 to 4)

(–8 to 7)

OFF/ON

SKIN DETECT

SKIN AREA IND

SKIN DTL SELECT

SKIN DETAIL

SKIN DETAIL LVL

SKIN DTL SAT

SKIN DTL HUE

SKIN DTL WIDTH

0

0

0

ON

0

0

0

0

ON

0

0

V

0

0

0

0

OFF

0

Default Description

ON

ON

Sets the detail correction function on/off.

Turns the aperture correction function on/off.

0

0

0

0

ON

Sets the general level of the detail signal.

Sets the aperture level.

Sets the level of the V detail signal.

Sets the crispening level.

Turns the level depend function on/off.

Sets the level of the level depend function.

Sets the frequency of the H detail signal.

Turns the knee aperture function on/off.

Sets the knee aperture level.

Sets the detail white limiter.

Sets the detail black limiter.

Sets the V detail black limiter.

Select the operation mode of DETAIL H/V

RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page. (H/V: H and V both enabled, V: V DTL only enabled)

Turns the detail function on or off.

Sets the general level of the detail signal.

Sets the crispening level.

Sets the detail white limiter.

Sets the detail black limiter.

Turns the level depend function on or off.

Sets the level depend level.

Sets the frequency of the H detail signal.

Sets the V detail.

Sets the cross color suppression level.

OFF Turns on all of 1, 2, and 3 of the color detail function.

EXEC Executes the color detail function.

Moves to color detection page.

OFF/ON OFF

1/2/3

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(0 to 359)

(0 to 359)

1

ON

0

0

0

40

Turns the zebra indication on/off in the area of the currently selected type of the color detail function.

Selects the channels to be displayed on the menu.

Turns the color detail function on/off for the selected channels.

Sets the level of the color detail signal.

Adjusts the saturation level of the hue possessed by the color detail function.

Adjusts the center phase of the hue possessed by the color detail function.

Adjusts the width of the hue possessed by the color detail function.

154

Menu List

No.

P12

P13

P14

Page

MTX LINEAR

Item

MATRIX

MATRIX (USER)

MATRIX (PRESET)

Settings

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

Default Description

ON Turns the linear matrix correction and userset matrix correction functions on/off.

OFF

ON

2

Turns the user-set matrix correction function on/off.

Turns the preset matrix correction function on/off.

Selects the preset matrix.

MTX MULTI

MATRIX (PRESET)

SEL

MATRIX R-G

1/2/3/4/5/6

MATRIX R-B

MATRIX G-R

MATRIX G-B

MATRIX B-R

MATRIX B-G

MATRIX

MATRIX (MULTI)

MATRIX AREA IND

MATRIX COLOR DET

MULTI MTX PRESET

MTX (MULTI) AXIS

MTX (MULTI) HUE

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

B/B+/MG–/MG/

MG+/R/R+/YL–/

YL/YL+/G–/G/

G+/CY/CY+/B–

(–99 to 99) 0

0

0

0

0

0

Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set matrix coefficients.

Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set matrix coefficients.

Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set matrix coefficients.

Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set matrix coefficients.

Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set matrix coefficients.

0

OFF

OFF

OFF

Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set matrix coefficients.

Turns the linear matrix correction and multi matrix correction functions on/off.

Turns the multi matrix correction function on/ off.

Turns the zebra indication on/off in the area corresponding to the currently selected setting.

EXEC Sets MTX (MULTI) AXIS to the axis corresponding to the detected color.

EXEC Presets settings for 16 axes of MTX (MULTI)

HUE and MTX (MULTI) SAT respectively.

B Selects the axis for which the multi matrix correction function can be changed.

MTX (MULTI) SAT

V MODULATION V MOD

MASTER VMOD

R VMOD

G VMOD

B VMOD

OUTPUT SELECT

1)

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

Y/R/G/B

0

ON

0

0

0

0

Y

Adjusts the color phase affected by the multi matrix correction function in every sixteenaxis mode.

Adjusts the saturation level affected by the multi matrix correction function in every sixteen-axis mode.

Turns the V modulation function on/off.

Turns the master V modulation function on/ off.

Turns the R V modulation function on/off.

Turns the G V modulation function on/off.

Turns the B V modulation function on/off.

Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the VBS/SDI

OUT

2)

.

Menu List

155

No.

P15

P16

Page Item

SATURATION SATURATION

SCENE FILE

SAT. LEVEL

LOW KEY SAT

L.KEY SAT LEVEL

L.KEY SAT RANGE

Y BLACK GAMMA

Y BLK GAM LEVEL

Settings

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

LOW/L.MID/

H.MID/HIGH

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/

H.MID/HIGH

1

4

5

2

3

STANDARD

SCENE RECALL

SCENE STORE

F.ID

16 characters

Default Description

OFF

0

Turns saturation adjustment function on/off.

Sets the saturation level.

OFF

0

HIGH

OFF

0

Turns the low key saturation function on/off.

Sets the saturation level of the low luminance part.

Sets the luminance level at which the low key saturation function becomes effective.

Turns the Y black gamma function on/off.

HIGH

Sets the gamma curve in the low luminance part.

Sets the luminance level at which the Y black gamma becomes effective.

Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of the camcorder.

Clears all current detail-adjusted settings and switch settings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file.

Recalls the scene file from the memory of the camcorder or the “Memory Stick.”

Stores the scene file in the memory of the camcorder or the “Memory Stick.”

Sets the File ID.

1) When Y is selected in the camcorder with an optional HKDW-702/902R, the color signal is output from the connector whose selected output signal is a SD signal.

2) When an optional HKDW-702/902R is installed, the HD-SDI OUT connector (located on the side of the camcorder) can be used as the VBS/SDI output connector.

3) When one of 50i, 25PsF, or 24PsF is selected, 105.0 is the factory setting.

4) This item is displayed when an optional HKDW-702/902R is installed.

When an HKDW-702 is installed, the SD output signal is not effective for 23.98PsF/24PsF. When an HKDW-902R is installed, the SD output signal is not effective for 24PsF. As a result, this menu operation is disabled in such a case.

5) When one of 50i, 24PsF, 25PsF or 23.98PsF is selected, this item is not displayed.

156

Menu List

MAINTENANCE Menu

The following table lists and describes the items in the

MAINTENANCE menu.

When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual.

No.

Page

M01 WHITE

SHADING

Item Settings

SHADING CH SEL R/G/B/TEST

M02 BLACK

SHADING

OUTPUT SELECT

1)

Y/R/G/B

R/G/B WHT H SAW (–99 to 99)

R/G/B WHT H PARA (–99 to 99)

R/G/B WHT V SAW (–99 to 99)

R/G/B WHT V PARA (–99 to 99)

WHITE SAW/PARA

SHADING CH SEL

OUTPUT SELECT

1)

OFF/ON

R/G/B/TEST

Y/R/G/B

R/G/B BLK H SAW (–99 to 99)

R/G/B BLK H PARA (–99 to 99)

R/G/B BLK V SAW (–99 to 99)

R/G/B BLK V PARA (–99 to 99)

BLACK SAW/PARA OFF/ON

MASTER BLACK

MASTER

GAIN(TMP)

(–99 to 99)

–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/

24/30/36/42 dB

0

0

0

0

ON

0

0 dB

Y

0

0

0

0

Default

TEST

ON

R

Y

Description

Selects the channel adjusted by shading. If

TEST is selected, the setting is the same as the setting of OUTPUT SELECT.

Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the VBS/SDI

OUT

2)

.

Adjusts the H Saw white shading compensation.

Adjusts the H Parabola white shading compensation.

Adjusts the V Saw white shading compensation.

Adjusts the V Parabola white shading compensation.

Turns white shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off.

Selects the channel adjusted by shading. If

TEST is selected, the setting is the same as the setting of OUTPUT SELECT.

Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the VBS/SDI

OUT

2)

.

For H Saw black shading compensation

For H Parabola black shading compensation

For V Saw black shading compensation

For V Parabola black shading compensation

Turns black shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off.

Adjusts the master black level.

Temporarily adjusts the master gain value.

Menu List

157

No.

Page

M03 LEVEL ADJ

M04

M05

SD LEVEL

ADJ

3)

BATTERY

Item

Y LEVEL

SYNC LEVEL

Pr LEVEL

Pb LEVEL

OUTPUT SELECT

1)

SD VBS LEVEL

SD VBS SETUP

LVL

BEFORE END 1

END 1

BEFORE END 2

END 2

BEFORE END 3

END 3

Settings

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

Y/R/G/B

(–99 to 99)

0% to 7.5%

5/10/15 to 95/100%

(in 5% steps)

0/1/2/3/4/5%

11.0 to 17.0 V

(in 0.1 V steps)

10.5 to 11.5 V

(in 0.1 V steps)

11.0 to 17.0 V

(in 0.1 V steps)

10.5 to 14.0 V

(in 0.1 V steps)

Default

0

0

0

0

Y

0

0%

5%

0%

11.3

11.0

11.8

11.0

Description

Adjusts the chrominance level of the output signal to the TEST OUT connector and to the viewfinder.

Adjusts the SYNC level of the output signal to the TEST OUT connector and to the viewfinder.

Adjusts the Pr level of the output signal to the

TEST OUT connector and to the viewfinder.

Adjusts the Pb level of the output signal to the

TEST OUT connector and to the viewfinder.

Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the VBS/SDI

OUT

2)

.

Adjusts the V level of the VBS output signal.

Selects the setup level of the VBS output signal.

4)

Used when a Sony-made battery pack, such as a BP-GL65/GL95, is used. Sets the voltage warning level just before the battery ends.

Used when a Sony-made battery pack, such as a BP-GL65/GL95, is used. Sets the voltage level at which the battery ends and the camcorder stops operation, just before the battery ends.

Used when a Sony-made battery pack, such as a BP-L60S, is used. Sets the voltage warning level just before the battery ends.

Used when a Sony-made battery pack, such as BP-L60S, is used. Sets the voltage level at which the battery ends and the camcorder stops operation, just before the battery ends.

Used when a battery pack other than a Sonymade one or an external power connected to the DC IN connector is used. Sets the voltage warning level just before the battery ends.

Used when a battery pack other than a Sonymade one or an external power connected to the DC IN connector is used. Sets the voltage level at which the battery ends and the camcorder stops operation, just before the battery ends.

158

Menu List

No.

Page

M06 AUDIO-1

M07 AUDIO-2

Item

AUDIO OUT (F/R) CUE/EE

REC AUDIO OUT

CAMERA

ADAPTER

AUDIO CH3/4

MODE

FRONT MIC REF

REAR MIC REF

REAR MIC +48V

AU REF OUT

AU CH12 AGC

MODE

AU CH34 AGC

MODE

Settings

EE/SAVE

ENABL/DSABL

CH1/2/SW

–60 dB/–50 dB/–40 dB

–60 dB/–50 dB/–40 dB

ENABL/DSABL

AU REC EMPHASIS OFF/ON

CUE REC OFF/ON

AU REF LEVEL –20 dB/–18 dB/–16 dB

–20 dB

0 dB/+4 dB/–3 dB 0 dB

MONO/STREO

MONO/STREO

AU AGC SPEC –6/–9/–12/–15/–17 dB

AU LIMITER MODE OFF/–6/–9/–12/

–15/–17 dB

AU OUT LIMITER OFF/ON

Default

CUE

EE

ENABL

SW

–50 dB

–60 dB

ENABL

OFF

ON

MONO

MONO

–6 dB

OFF

ON

Description

Selects the audio output signal during FF/

REW.

CUE: cue audio signal

EE: Input signal

Selects the audio output signal during recording.

EE: Input signal

SAVE: Not output

When a camera adaptor is connected, selects whether or not to enable input of audio channels 3 and 4 from the camera adaptor.

ENABL: Camera adaptor can be used.

DSABL: Camera adaptor cannot be used.

Selects the sources to be recorded on channels 3 and 4.

CH1/2: Same sources as channels 1 and 2.

SW: Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH-3/

CH-4 switches.

Sets the reference level of the front microphone.

Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN

CH1 or CH2 connector is set to MIC.

Selects whether external power is supplied to the external microphone when AUDIO IN

CH1 or CH2 connector is set to MIC.

Turns the emphasis function on/off.

Turns cue audio recording on/off.

Sets the audio reference input level.

Sets the output reference level.

Selects the automatic adjustment mode of the input levels of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 1 and 2; MONO (to independently adjust channel 1 and 2) or

STREO (stereo mode).

Selects the automatic adjustment mode of the input levels of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 3 and 4; MONO (to independently adjust channel 3 and 4) or

STREO (stereo mode).

Sets the AGC characteristics (saturation level).

Sets the limiter characteristics (saturation level) for high-level input signals in manual adjustment of the audio input level.

Turns the audio output limiter on/off.

Menu List

159

No.

Page

M08 AUDIO-3

Item

AU SG (1kHz)

MIC CH1 LEVEL

MIC CH2 LEVEL

REAR1/WRR

LEVEL

REAR2/WRR

LEVEL

AUDIO SELECT

CH3

AUDIO SELECT

CH4

Settings

ON/OFF/AUTO

SIDE1/FRONT/

F+S1

SIDE2/FRONT/

F+S2

SIDE1/FRONT/

F+S1

SIDE2/FRONT/

F+S2

AUTO/MANU

AUTO/MANU

LVL CONTROL CH3 0 to 100

LVL CONTROL CH4 0 to 100

Default

OFF

FRONT

FRONT

SIDE 1

SIDE 2

AUTO

AUTO

70

70

Description

Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone during the Color Bar mode or not.

ON: a 1 kHz test tone is output during the

Color Bar mode.

OFF: a 1 kHz test tone is not output during the Color Bar mode.

AUTO: a 1 kHz test tone is output only when the CH 1 AUDIO SELECT switch on the inside panel is in the AUTO position.

When recording the front microphone sound on audio channel CH-1, select which control is to be used for the level adjustment.

SIDE 1: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (left side) on the side panel.

FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel.

F + S1: It can be adjusted using either the

LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC

LEVEL control. (The two controls are linked to each other.)

When recording the front microphone sound on audio channel CH-2, select which control is to be used for the level adjustment.

SIDE 2: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (right side) on the side panel.

FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel.

F + S2: It can be adjusted using either the

LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC

LEVEL control. (The two controls are linked to each other.)

Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel.

SIDE 1: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (left side) on the side panel.

FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel.

F + S1: It can be adjusted using either the

LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC

LEVEL control. (The two controls are linked to each other.)

Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel.

SIDE 2: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (right side) on the side panel.

FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel.

F + S2: It can be adjusted using either the

LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC

LEVEL control. (The two controls are linked to each other.)

Selects either automatic operation or manual operation to adjust the audio recording level of audio channel 3.

Selects either automatic operation or manual operation to adjust the audio recording level of audio channel 4.

Adjusts the audio recording level of audio channel 3 in manual operation mode.

Adjusts the audio recording level of audio channel 4 in manual operation mode.

160

Menu List

No.

Page

M09 TIMECODE

M10 VTR MODE

Item

TC OUT

DF/NDF

5)

EXT-LK UBIT

LTC UBIT

VITC UBIT

WATCH AUTO ADJ

UBIT GROUP ID

REC TALLY BLINK

REC START BEEP

LCD DISPLAY

HOLD

LCD HOLD TIMER

SHOT TIME DISP

VIDEO OUT (F/R)

Settings

AUTO/GENE

DF/NDF

INT/EXT

FIX/TIME

FIX/TIME

OFF/ON

000/101

OFF/ON

OFF/ON OFF

TIMER/OFF/CONT TIMER

1H/3H/8H

MD:HM/DM:HM/

D:HMS

EE/PB

STBY OFF TIMER OFF/5MIN/10MIN/

30MIN/60MIN

STOP KEY FREEZE OFF/FRAME/

FIELD

Default

AUTO

DF

INT

FIX

FIX

ON

000

ON

1H

MD:HM

EE

60MIN

OFF

Description

Selects the time code signal output.

AUTO: Outputs the time code generator output during recording and outputs the time code reader output during playback.

GENE: Outputs the time code generator output during recording and playback.

Sets DF or NDF mode.

DF: Drop frame mode

NDF: Non-drop frame mode

Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to an INT or an EXT source when the time code is locked to an external source.

INT: Internal lock

EXT: External lock

Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of LTC.

FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.

TIME: Records the present time.

Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of VITC.

FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.

TIME: Records the present time.

Turns the automatic time correction function of the built-in clock on/off. With ON, the time of the built-in clock matches the time data of the user bits of an external time code.

Selects the UBIT GROUP ID.

Turns the tally illumination control on/off in the event of BATTERY BEFORE END/TAPE

BEFORE END.

Turns the alarm sound at REC START/STOP on/off.

Sets the time code (TC) display after poweroff as follows.

TIMER: The TC display turns off after the elapse of the time set by the LCD HOLD

TIMER below.

OFF: Not displayed.

CONT: Displayed.

Sets the duration of time after which the TC display is to be turned off after power-off, when LCD DISPLAY HOLD is set to TIMER

(H: hours).

Selects the format of the time to be displayed on the LCD.

MD:HM: Month, day, hour, minute

DM:HM: Day, month, hour, minute

D:HMS: Day, hour, minute, second

Selects the video output signal during FF/

REW.

EE: Input signal

PB: Playback signal

Sets the length of time for the stand-by off timer when the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to STBY.

Selects the type of frozen picture to be used when the recorded video signal is stopped by pushing the STOP button during playback.

Menu List

161

No.

Page

M11 SHOT MARKER LTC UB-MARKER SET/ALL/OFF

M13 DCC ADJUST

Item

REC START MARK

DCC FUNCTION

SEL

OFF/ON

SHOT MARKER 1 OFF/ON

SHOT MARKER 2 OFF/ON

M12 PRESET WHT COLOR TEMP <P> Display color temperature.

C. TEMP BAL <P> (–99 to 99)

R GAIN

B GAIN

5600K

Settings

<P> (–99 to 99)

<P> (–99 to 99)

<P> OFF/ON

AWB ENABLE <P> OFF/ON

DCC/FIX

DCC D RANGE

DCC POINT

DCC GAIN

400/450/500/550/

600%

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

DCC DELAY TIME (–99 to 99)

PREKNEE POINT AUTO/FIX

600%

0

0

0

AUTO

0

0

OFF

OFF

OFF

3200

0

Default

SET

Description

Sets whether to write the markers in UBIT of

LTC or not.

SET: To independently select the ON/OFF setting of the following items, REC START

MARK, SHOT MARK 1, and SHOT MARK

2

ALL: To write REC START MARK, SHOT

MARK 1, and SHOT MARK 2 all.

OFF: None are written.

Turns REC START MARK on/off.

Turns SHOT MARK 1 on/off.

Turns SHOT MARK 2 on/off.

White balance preset value

OFF

OFF

DCC

The color temperature adjustment is not satisfactory with COLOR TEMP <P>, adjust the value more precisely.

R gain preset value

B gain preset value

Turns the electric 5600K filter on/off.

Turns the function for judging the AWB adjustment when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRESET on and off.

Selects the function to be assigned to the

DCC switch.

FIX is fixed knee.

Sets the dynamic range when the DCC switch is set to the ON position.

For the DCC minimum knee point adjustment

For the gain adjustment to the DCC detected value

Adjusts the DCC reaction speed.

AUTO: Special dark knee point adjustment is done with DCC OFF.

FIX: The same preknee point adjustment is done with DCC OFF as with DCC ON.

162

Menu List

No.

Page

M14 AUTO IRIS 2

Item

IRIS WINDOW

Settings

1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR

IRIS WINDOW IND OFF/ON

IRIS LEVEL

IRIS APL RATIO

IRIS VAR WIDTH

IRIS VAR HEIGHT

IRIS VAR H POS.

IRIS VAR V POS.

IRIS SPEED

CLIP HIGH LIGHT

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

20 to 479

20 to 269

–460 to 460

–249 to 249

0/1/2/3/4/5

OFF/ON

0

0

Default

1

OFF

240

135

0

0

3

OFF

Description

Selects the auto iris detection window. VAR is variable.

Turns the function which displays a frame marker for the auto iris detection window on and off.

Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value.

Adjusts the mix ratio of the auto iris detection peak value and average value.

Sets the width and height of the detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.

Sets the height of the detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.

Sets the horizontal position of the detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.

Sets the vertical position of the detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.

Adjusts the auto iris operation speed.

Turns the function which, during auto iris adjustment, ignores very bright areas by dulling the reaction to high luminescence on and off.

Menu List

163

No.

Page

M15 FUNCTION 3

M16 FUNCTION 4

M17

M18

GENLOCK

ND COMP

Item

WHT FILTER INH

COLOR BAR SEL SMPTE/100 %/75

%/4:3-1/4:3-2/4:3-3

SHT DISP MODE SEC/DEG

100 %

SEC

RM COMMON

MEMORY

Settings

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

VTR START/STOP RM/PARA/CAM

FAN

USER & ALL ONLY

HD SDI REMOTE

I/F

SD ASPECT

PULSE

3), 4)

WHITE GAIN

RANGE

GENLOCK

RETURN VIDEO

GL H PHASE

COASE

OFF/ON/AUTO

OFF/ON

OFF/CHARA/G-

TLY/R-TLY

OFF/ON

WIDE/NRW

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

(–99 to 99)

GL H PHASE FINE (–99 to 99)

ND OFFSET

ADJUST

CLEAR ND

OFFSET

OFF/ON

Default

OFF

Description

Turns the function which inhibits independent white memory for each filter position on and off.

Selects the color bar type.

ON

RM

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

WIDE

ON

OFF

0

0

EXEC

Selects whether to display the shutter speed in seconds or degrees.

Selects whether or not to share settings when an RM remote control unit is connected and when the camcorder is used alone.

Selects which VTR START/STOP buttons (on the RM, camera, or both) are enabled when an RM-series remote control unit is connected.

OFF: Stops a fan operation.

AUTO: Stops a fan operation while the VTR of the camcorder is recording.

Selects whether to show only USER, USER

MENU CUSTOMIZE, and ALL menus in the top menu.

Selects the setting when recording as synchronizing with multiple HDW-S250/S280 cassette recorders by superimposing the trigger signal on the output signal from the

HD-SDI OUT connector.

OFF: Does not carry out synchronous recording.

Selects the display method when the recording trigger signal is output from the HD-

SDI OUT connector (when an HDW-250/

S280 is recording).

CHARA: REC 2 is displayed on the display section of the viewfinder.

G-TYL: The green tally is turned on.

R-TLY: The REC tally is turned on. Pay attention to the fact that this REC tally is lit even when a cassette is not loaded in the camcorder.

Selects whether the 16:9 (SQEZE) signal is superimposed on the VBS/SDI output signal from the HD-SDI OUT connector located on the side of the camcorder when an optional

HKDW-702/902R is installed.

2)

Specifies the settable range of white gain.

WIDE: –30 dB to +7 dB

NRW: –7 dB to +7 dB

Turns genlock on and off.

Turns return video on and off.

Adjusts the genlock H phase.

Adjusts the genlock H phase.

Turns the mode which sets ND (neutral density) filter color compensation values on and off.

Clears ND filter color compensation values.

164

Menu List

No.

M19

M20

Page

FORMAT

VANC RX

Item

CURRENT

NEXT

UMID LINE1

UMID LINE2

Settings

(Display only)

59.94/50i/23.98/

24PsF/25PsF/

29.97

0, 9 to 20

0, 564 to 593

Default

23.98

0

0

Description

Displays the currently selected frame frequency.

Selects the frame frequency. The selected frame frequency becomes effective after the power is turned off and then on again.

Selects the line on which the UMID is to be recorded (First field). When 0 is selected, the

UMID is not recorded.

Selects the line on which the UMID is to be recorded (Second field). When 0 is selected, the UMID is not recorded.

1) When Y is selected in the camcorder with an optional HKDW-702/902R, the color signal is output from the connector whose selected output signal is an SD signal.

2) When an optional HKDW-702/902R is installed, the HD SDI OUT connector (located on the side of the camcorder) can be used as the VBS/SDI output connector.

3) When an optional HKDW-702/902R is installed, this item is displayed.

When an HKDW-702 is installed, the SD output signal is not effective for 23.98PsF/24PsF. When an HKDW-902R is installed, the SD output signal is not effective for 24PsF. As a result, this menu operation is disabled in such a case.

4) When one of 50i, 25PsF or 24PsF is selected, this item is not displayed.

5) When one of 50i, 25PsF, 24PsF or 23.98PsF is selected, this item is not displayed.

Menu List

165

FILE Menu

The following table lists and describes the items in the

FILE menu.

When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative

No.

Page

F01

USER FILE

1)

Item

USER FILE LOAD

USER FILE SAVE

F. ID

USER PRESET value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual.

Settings

Default

EXEC

— EXEC

16 characters —

— EXEC

Description

See “6-1 Saving and Loading User Files” on page 108.

F02 USER FILE2 STORE USR PRESET —

F03 ALL FILE

CLEAR USR PRESET —

CUSTOMIZE RESET

BEFORE FILE PAGE

USER LOAD WHITE

LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF/ON

LOAD OUT OF USER OFF/ON

ALL FILE LOAD

ALL FILE SAVE

F. ID

ALL PRESET

STORE ALL PRESET —

CLEAR ALL PRESET —

EXEC

EXEC

16 characters —

— EXEC

EXEC

EXEC

3SEC CLR PRESET

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

EXEC

EXEC

EXEC

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

See “5-4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the

Standard Settings” on page 107.

Sets the pages registered in the USER menu to the standard setting.

Clears the standard setting of pages registered in the USER menu.

Returns pages and items registered in the

USER menu to the factory default state.

Selects whether to read the USER MENU

CUSTOMIZE settings to be loaded by USER

FILE LOAD.

Selects whether to read pages not registered by USER FILE LOAD.

Selects whether to read data after USER FILE pages by USER FILE LOAD.

Selects whether to read white balance data by

USER FILE LOAD.

Loads the ALL file.

Saves the ALL file.

To name the ALL file.

Returns items in the ALL file to preset values.

Sets the preset values of items in the ALL file.

Clears the preset values of items in the ALL file.

Turns the function to clear the preset value of each item when the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch is kept pressed to CANCEL/PRST for 3 seconds on and off.

See “6-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files” on page 112.

F04 SCENE FILE 1

2

3

4

5

STANDARD

SCENE RECALL

SCENE STORE

F. ID

EXEC

— EXEC

16 characters —

166

Menu List

No.

F06

Page

USER

GAMMA

Item

REFERENCE LOAD

REFERENCE SAVE

F. ID

USER GAMMA LOAD

USER GAMMA RESET —

F. ID

F. ID

2)

DATE

2)

Settings

F05 REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE —

REFERENCE CLEAR —

(Display only)

(Display only)

(Display only)

Default

EXEC

EXEC

EXEC

EXEC

16 characters —

SCENE WHITE DATA OFF/ON OFF

EXEC

EXEC

Description

Saves the reference file in internal memory.

Clears the reference file.

Loads the reference file.

Saves the reference file to a “Memory Stick.”

To name the reference file.

See “White balance setting data to be saved in the scene file” on page 113.

Copies the user gamma file stored in the

“Memory Stick” into the internal memory.

Clears the user gamma data stored in the internal memory.

Name of the user gamma data stored in the internal memory.

Name of the user gamma data stored in the

“Memory Stick”

Creation date of the user gamma data stored in the “Memory Stick”

F07 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL

LENS FILE STORE

F. ID

SOURCE

EXEC

EXEC

EXEC

ON

Loads lens files.

Saves lens files.

16 characters —

To name lens files.

MEMORY1 Number of selected lens file

LENS NO OFFSET —

LENS AUTO RECALL OFF/ON

L. ID

L. MF

(Display only)

(Display only)

To clear lens files.

Turns the automatic recall function for serial lens on and off.

To show the lens-specific ID (when a serial lens is connected).

To show the name of the lens manufacturer

(when a serial lens is connected).

F08 LENS FILE 2 LENS M VMOD

LENS CENTER H

(–99 to 99)

–480 to 479

0

0

LENS CENTER V

OUTPUT SELECT

3)

–270 to 269

Y/R/G/B

0

Y

For lens file V Saw shading

For the horizontal position compensation of lens file center marker

For the vertical position compensation of lens file center marker

Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the VBS/SDI OUT

4)

.

Adjusts the lens file flare (R).

LENS R FLARE

LENS G FLARE

LENS B FLARE

LENS W-R OFST

LENS W-B OFST

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

0

0

0

0

0

Adjusts the lens file flare (G).

Adjusts the lens file flare (B).

Adjusts the white R compensation value for the lens file.

Adjusts the white B compensation value for the lens file.

Menu List

167

No.

Page Item

F09 LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL

OUTPUT SELECT

3)

LENS R/G/B H SAW

LENS R/G/B H PARA

LENS R/G/B V SAW

LENS R/G/B V PARA

Settings Default

R/G/B/TEST R

Y/R/G/B

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

(–99 to 99)

Y

0

0

0

0

Description

Selects the channel adjusted by shading. If

TEST is selected, the setting is the same as the setting of OUTPUT SELECT.

Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector, the input signal to the viewfinder, and the output signal from the VBS/SDI OUT

4)

.

For the H Saw white shading compensation for the lens file

For the H Parabola white shading compensation for the lens file

For the V Saw white shading compensation for the lens file

For the V Parabola white shading compensation for the lens file

Turns the image inversion function on/off.

F10

F11

MEMORY

STICK

TELE FILE

IMAGE INVERT

M.S. FORMAT

TELE FILE CLEAR

TELE FILE MARK

ID

SIZE

REMAIN

STATUS

5)

M.S. IN > JUMP TO

OFF/ON OFF

— EXEC

OFF/USER/

ALL/SCENE/

LENS/REFER/

USER1

OFF

OK/NG/KP

EXEC

OK

20 characters —

0 to 9999 KBYTE

0 to 100 %

STANDBY/NO

LABEL/

WRITE

PROTECT/

UNKNOWN

FORMAT/

UNFORMAT/

MEMORY

FULL/NEAR

FULL

Formats a “Memory Stick.”

See “6-3 Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page

When Inserting a “Memory Stick”” on page

116.

See “3-4 Recording the Recording Start Time

Code onto the Memory Label — Tele-File” on page 53.

Displays the status under which the Tele-File mark function is to be used.

1) This USER FILE page has been also registered in the USER menu at the factory. This, you can access this page without accessing the TOP menu.

2) Displays only when a “Memory Stick” in which user gamma files are stored is inserted.

3) When Y is selected in the camcorder with an optional HKDW-702/902R, the color signal is output from the connector whose selected output signal is an SD signal.

4) When an optional HKDW-702/902R is installed, the HD-SDI OUT connector (located on the side of the camcorder) can be used as the VBS/SDI output connector.

5) This item is displayed when an optional HKDW-905R is installed.

168

Menu List

DIAGNOSIS Menu

The following table lists and describes the items in the

DIAGNOSIS menu.

No.

Page Item

D01 HOURS METER RESET METER

DRUM RUNNING

TAPE RUNNING

OPERATION

THREADING

DRUM RUNNING-2

TAPE RUNNING-2

OPERATION-2

D02 TIME/DATE

THREADING-2

ADJUST

HOUR

MIN

SEC

YEAR

MONTH

DAY

D03 ROM VERSION AT: Ver. X.XX

SS: Ver. X.XX

FP: Ver X.XX

AU DSP: Ver X.XX

EQ: Ver X.XX

D04 DEV STATUS I/O EEPROM LSI NVRAMAM

SCI

D05 OPTION BOARD DOWN CONVERTER

PICTURE CACHE

SLOW SHUTTER

Description

Resets the resettable meters (-2).

Displays the total time the drum has rotated.

Displays the accumulated time the tape has run.

Display the time that the unit has been powered on.

Displays the number of times of tape threading.

Displays the total time the drum has rotated (reset possible).

Displays the accumulated time the tape has run (reset possible).

Displays the times that the unit has been powered on (reset possible).

Displays the number of times of tape threading (reset possible).

See “5-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock” on page

98.

Displays the ROM version.

Displays the self diagnosis.

Displays the installed options.

Menu List

169

About a “Memory Stick”

What is “Memory Stick”?

“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile

IC (Integrated Circuit) recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data among “Memory Stick” compatible products. Because it is removable, “Memory Stick” can also be used for external data storage.

“Memory Stick” media are available in three sizes: standard size, compact “Memory Stick Duo” size, and the smallest “Memory Stick Micro” (“M2”

1)

) size. Once attached to a Memory Stick Duo adapter, a “Memory Stick

Duo” is the same size as a standard “Memory Stick,” and as a result can be used with products requiring a standard

“Memory Stick.” Also, once attached to a standard-size

M2 adaptor, a “Memory Stick Micro” is the same size as a standard “Memory Stick,” and as a result can be used with products requiring a standard “Memory Stick.”

1) “M2” is an abbreviation for “Micro Memory Stick.”

Types of “Memory Stick”

“Memory Stick” is available in the following six types to meet various requirements in functions.

“Memory Stick”

Stores any type of data except copyright-protected data that requires the “MagicGate” copyright protection technology.

“MagicGate Memory Stick”

Equipped with the “MagicGate” copyright protection technology.

“Memory Stick” (“MagicGate”/High-Speed

Transfer Compatible)

Equipped with “MagicGate” copyright protection technology and allows high-speed data transfer.

This type of “Memory Stick” can be used with products requiring a “Memory Stick,” “MagicGate Memory Stick,” and “Memory Stick PRO.”

1)

Your camcorder is not compliant with high-speed data transfer with this type of “Memory Stick.”

1) Operation is not guaranteed for all of the compliant products (Some products may not accept this type of “Memory Stick.”)

“Memory Stick-ROM”

Stores pre-recorded, read-only data. You cannot record on

“Memory Stick-ROM” or erase the pre-recorded data.

“Memory Stick” (with Memory Select Function)

Composed of multiple 128 MB memory units.

The mechanical switch at the back of the “Memory Stick” allows you to select the memory unit to be used depending on usage.

The memory units cannot be used simultaneously and continuously.

“Memory Stick PRO”

“Memory Stick” with “MagicGate” copyright protection technology, exclusive for “Memory Stick PRO”-compliant products.

Available types of “Memory Stick”

You can use a “Memory Stick,” “MagicGate Memory

Stick,” or a “Memory Stick PRO” with your camcorder.

(32, 64 and 128 MB to 2 GB compatible)

Note

You can not use a “Memory Stick Duo” alone with your camcorder. To use a “Memory Stick Duo” with your camcorder, you must attach it to an optional Memory Stick

Duo Adaptor. If you insert a “Memory Stick Duo” without the adaptor, it may become stuck in the slot and be impossible to remove.

Note on data read/write speed

Data read/write speed may vary depending on the combination of the “Memory Stick” and “Memory Stick” compliant product you use.

What is “MagicGate”?

“MagicGate” is copyright protection technology that uses encryption technology.

Before using a “Memory Stick”

Terminal

Write-protect tab

Labelling position

• When you set the “Memory Stick” erasure prevention switch to “LOCK,” data cannot be recorded, edited, or erased.

• Data may be damaged if:

—You remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the unit while it is reading or writing data.

—You use the “Memory Stick” in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or electric noise.

• We recommend that you make a backup copy of important data that you record on the “Memory Stick”.

170

About a “Memory Stick”

Notes

• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to the “Memory Stick” labeling position.

• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the labeling position.

• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.

• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick” with anything, including your finger or metallic objects.

• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick”.

• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.

• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.

• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location that is:

— Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun

— Under direct sunlight

— Very humid or subject to corrosive substances

ACCESS Indicator

If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing, data is being read from or written to the “Memory Stick”. At this time, do not shake the computer or product or subject them to shock. Do not turn off the power of the computer and product or remove the “Memory Stick”. This may damage the data.

Precautions

• To prevent data loss, make backups of data frequently. In no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data.

• Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the provisions of copyright law. When you use a “Memory

Stick” that has been pre-recorded, be sure that the material has been recorded in accordance with copyright and other applicable laws.

• The “Memory Stick” application software may be modified or changed by Sony without prior notice.

• Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage performances and other entertainment events, even if they are recorded for personal use only.

• “Memory Stick”, and “MagicGate Memory

Stick” are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

• “Memory Stick Duo” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

• “Memory Stick PRO” and trademarks of Sony Corporation.

• “Memory Stick PRO Duo” and

are

are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

• “Memory Stick-ROM” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

• “MagicGate Memory Stick” is trademark of Sony

Corporation.

• “MagicGate” and

Corporation.

are trademarks of Sony

About a “Memory Stick”

171

Index

Symbols

+48V/OFF switches 21

‘!’ LED 147

‘!’ LED page 86

‘!’ LED STD 86, 148

A

ABNORMAL <!> window 91

AC adaptor 119

ACCESS indicator 27

Accessory Attachments 18

Accidental erasure 36

AC-DN10 119

Actual time in the time code 72

ADVANCE button 30

ALARM volume control 20

Aliasing 15

ALL FILE 166

ALL menu 75

Anton Bauer Ultralight System 119

ASSIGN 1/2 switches 24

ASSIGN EDIT 80

ASSIGN SW <1> window 97

ASSIGN SW <2> window 97

Assignable Switches 96

ATW 62, 146

Audio channel level meter 32

Audio Functions 19

AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 21

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches 21

Audio level 68

AUDIO OUT connector 21

AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches

20

AUDIO STATUS window 91

AUDIO-1 159

AUDIO-2 159

AUDIO-3 160

Auto Interval Rec mode 43

AUTO IRIS 149

AUTO IRIS 2 163

AUTO IRIS page 66

Auto Tracing White 62, 146

AUTO W/B BAL switch 24

Automatic black balance adjustment

59

Automatic iris adjustment 66

Automatic iris window 67

Automatic white balance adjustment

60

B

BACK TALLY indicator 31

BACK TALLY switch 31

BATT indicator 34

BATTERY 158

Battery attachment 17

Battery pack 118

Battery status indicator 32

BKW-401 120

Black balance 59

BLACK GAMMA 153

BLACK SHADING 157

BLACK/FLARE 152

BP-GL65/GL95/L60S 118

BRIGHT control 22

Built-in speaker 20

C

Camera operator tally indicator 23

CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch 28

Cassette

loading 35

unloading 36

CC filter 60

CCD image sensors 15

CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch 19

Cleaning

video heads 136 viewfinder 136

Color temperature 95

Condensation 132

Continues recording 38

Continuous Trigger mode 47

CONTRAST control 22

CUE IN switch 21

D

DATA DISPLAY switch 30

Date/Time of the Internal Clock 98

DC IN connector 17

DC OUT 12 V connector 21

DCC ADJUST 162

DETAIL 1 154

DETAIL 2 154

DEV STATUS 169

DIAGNOSIS menu 76

Diopter adjustment 120

Diopter adjustment ring 23

Display mode 85

Display panel 32

DISPLAY switch 30

DISPLAY/ASPECT switch 31

Drop frame mode 72

E

EARPHONE jacks 19

ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode 62

EJECT button 26

Eject button 27

End Search function 51

Error messages 140

EVS (Enhanced Vertical definition

System) mode 63

External microphone 125

Eyepiece 121

disassembling 136

F

F FWD button and indicator 26

FILE menu 76

FILTER selector 23

Flange focal length 122

Fog-proof filter 136

FORMAT 165

Freeze Mix Function 104

Freeze-frame mode 57

F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch 30

FUNCTION 1 145

FUNCTION 1 page 96

FUNCTION 2 146

FUNCTION 3 164

FUNCTION window 91

G

Gain 93

GAIN selector 24

GAIN SW 149

GAIN SW page 93

GAMMA 153

GAMMA page 102

GENLOCK 164

GENLOCK IN connector 29

GENLOCK page 92

Good shot marks 39

H

HD-SDI OUT connector 25

HKDW-702 52

HKDW-703 43

HKDW-902R 52

HKDW-905R 64

HOLD button 30

HOURS METER 169

Hyper Gamma 102

I

Interval Rec Function 43

172

Index

K

KNEE 1 153

KNEE 2 153

L

LCD LIGHT switch 32

Lens

mounting 122

LENS connector 18

LENS FILE 151

Lens file 99

LENS FILE 1 167

LENS FILE 2 167

LENS FILE 3 168

LENS FILE page 99

Lens locking lever 18

Lens mount 18

Lens mount cap 18

LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls 20

LEVEL ADJ 158

LIGHT connector 18

Light shoe 18

LIGHT switch 17

LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors 21

LOCK knob 23

M

MAINTENANCE menu 76

Manual Interval Rec mode 47

MARKER 1 148

MARKER 1 page 87

MARKER 2 148

Marker Display 87

“MEMORY STICK” 168

Memory Stick compartment 27

MEMORY STICK OPEN button 27

MEMORY STICK page 116

MENU knob 27

MENU ON/OFF switch 27

Menu Organization 75

MIC IN connector 19

MIC LEVEL control 19

Microphone 19

MLB-1M-100 53

MONITOR switch 19

MONITOR volume control 20

MTX LINEAR 155

MTX MULTI 155

N

ND COMP 164

ND filter 60

Non-drop frame mode 72

O

OFFSET WHT 150

OFFSET WHT page 95

OPERATION menu 76

Operation messages 140

Operation warnings 139

OPTION BOARD 169

OUTPUT SEL 144

OUTPUT SEL page 94

Output Signals 94

OUTPUT/DCC switch 24

P

PAINT menu 76

PEAKING control 22

Picture Cache Function 41

Picture Cache mode 41

Picture Cache time 41

PLAY button and indicator 26

Playback in Color 52

Power Supply 17

POWER switch 17

PRESET WHT 162

PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch 30

R

Rain Cover 129

REAR TALLY indicator 32

REC indicator 34

Recording Review 51

REFERENCE 167

Reference file 115

REMOTE connector 25

RESET button 30

RE-TAKE function 50

Return video signal 92

REW button and indicator 26

ROM VERSION 169

S

SATURATION 156

SCENE FILE 156, 166

Scene file 112

loading 114

saving 112

SCENE FILE page 112

SD DETAIL 154

SET STATUS 149

SET STATUS page 92

SHIFT button 30

SHOT DISP 149

SHOT DISP page 89

SHOT ID 149

Shot ID 89

SHOT ID page 89

SHOT MARKER 162

Shot marks 39

Shoulder pad 18, 129

Shoulder strap 128

Shoulder strap posts 18

SHT ENABLE 150

SHT ENABLE page 65

SHUTTER selector 24

Single Trigger mode 47

SKIN DETAIL 154

SLS (slow speed shutter) mode 62

Stand-by off Timer 58

Status Confirmation Windows 91

STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch 27

STOP button 26

Supplied accessories 141

Supplied microphone 123

SW STATUS 152

System configuration 14

T

TALLY indicator 22, 31, 34

TALLY switch 23, 31

Tape status indicator 32

TC IN connector 29

TC OUT connector 29

TELE 168

TELE FILE 168

TELE FILE page 55

Tele-File 53

Tele-File mark 54

TEST OUT 150

TEST OUT connector 25

Time code display 33

Time code setting 72

Time code synchronization 73

TIME/DATE 169

TIME/DATE page 98

TIMECODE 161

TOP menu 75

Tripod 127

Tripod adaptor 127

Tripod mount 18

TURBO GAIN button 25

TURBO SW window 97

U

UHF portable tuners 126

UMID SET 151

UMID SET page 101

User bits 73

USER FILE 166

User File 109

USER FILE page 107

USER FILE2 166

USER GAMMA 167

Index

173

USER Gamma 103

USER menu 75

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu 75

V

V MODULATION 155

VANC RX 165

Vertical smear 15

VF DISP 1 147

VF DISP 1 page 84

VF DISP 2 147

VF DISP 2 page 85

VF SETTING 149

VF SETTING page 88

Viewfinder 22

detaching 120

Viewfinder front-rear positioning lever

23

Viewfinder left-right positioning ring

23

Viewfinder position 119

Viewfinder Rotation Bracket 120

Viewfinder stopper 23

VTR MODE 161

VTR operation status and status indicators 33

VTR SAVE indicator 34

VTR SAVE/STBY switch 26

VTR START button 26

W

Warning (!) indicator 34

WARNING indicator 32

WHITE 152

WHITE BAL switch 24

White balance 60

White flecks 15

WHITE page 95

WHITE SHADING 157

WRR-855A/855B 126

WRR-861/862 126

Z

ZEBRA switch 22

174

Index

The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual.

Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony

Corporation.

HDW-F900R

(SY)

3-991-852-04(1)

Sony Corporation

Printed in Japan

2008.01.13

© 2006

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents